Vous êtes sur la page 1sur 310

 

1.1.1 DESIGN BASIS


RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Document No. RAFA3-AAC-211002

Document Title HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

TTCL Job No. F-043

AA Job No. 155301

Total 28 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

2/A 11-Jan-16 Issued for


ML MA RM MS
Construction
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


0/A 16-Apr-15 For Review
1/A 17-Nov-15 For Review
2/A 11-Jan-16 Issued for Construction

Page 2 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

CONTENTS

1. AIM ...................................................................................................................................................5

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ...................................5

3. DESIGN BASES AND PARAMETERS .........................................................................................6

3.1. SITE LOCATION ......................................................................................................................6

3.2. CLIMATE CONDITIONS.........................................................................................................6

3.3. INDOOR CONDITIONS ...........................................................................................................6

3.4. VENTILATION AND FRESH AIR SUPPLY ..........................................................................8

3.5. PRESSURIZATION ..................................................................................................................9

3.6. AIR QUALITY ..........................................................................................................................9

3.7. IMPUT DATA FOR THERMAL LOADS CALCULATION.................................................10

3.7.1. INTERNAL LOAD CRITERIA FOR BUILDINGS........................................................10

3.7.2. BUILDING ENVELOPE..................................................................................................11

3.8. AIR DISTRIBUTION ..............................................................................................................13

3.8.1. DUCTS..............................................................................................................................13

3.8.2. ROOM AIR DISTRIBUTION..............................................................................................14

3.9. REFRIGERANTS ....................................................................................................................15

3.10. ENERGY SAVINGS............................................................................................................16

3.10.1. DUCT INSULATION...................................................................................................16

3.10.2. PIPES INSULATION ...................................................................................................17

3.10.3. HVAC EQUIPMENT PERFOMANCE REQUIREMENTS........................................17

4. HVAC SYSTEM.............................................................................................................................18

4.1. MAIN PROCESS BUILDING.................................................................................................18

4.2. ELECTRICAL BUILDING .....................................................................................................20

Page 3 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

4.3. TRANSFORMERS ROOMS ...................................................................................................20

4.4. LOCAL CONTROL ROOM....................................................................................................21

4.5. BATTERY ROOMS ................................................................................................................22

4.6. OFFICES ..................................................................................................................................22

4.7. PUMP ROOMS........................................................................................................................23

4.8. DAF BUIDING ........................................................................................................................24

4.9. WORKSHOP............................................................................................................................25

4.10. WAREHOUSE .....................................................................................................................25

4.11. WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUIDING ......................................................................26

4.12. CO2 GENERATION BUILDING ........................................................................................26

4.13. CHLORINE BUILDING......................................................................................................26

4.14. LIME STONE CONTACTORS BUILDING.......................................................................27

4.15. CORROSION PROTECTION .............................................................................................27

4.16. HVAC CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION ............................................................27

4.17. VIBRATION ........................................................................................................................28

4.18. POWER SUPPLY ................................................................................................................28

Page 4 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

1. AIM

This document includes the description of the general criteria for the HVAC design of Ras Abu Fontas
A3 Desalination Plant.

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

The design of the Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning systems shall be in accordance with the
following applicable national and international codes, specifications, and standards.

• CQS 2014. Qatar Construction Standards

• MFS. Minimal Functional Specification for RAFA3 the New Water Plant at Ras Abu Fontas

• American Society of Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)


Handbooks.
• ASHRAE Standard 15-Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems
• ASHRAE Standard 62. Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality
• ASHRAE Standard 90.1. Energy Standard for Building Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings
• Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)
• American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
• American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
• Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors National Association - Ductwork Standards
(SMACNA).
• Air Movement and Conditioning Association, AMCA
• American ISA Standard S71.01 and S71.04
• UFC 3-410-04N (Industrial Ventilation)
• National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) codes and standards
• International Building Code.
• International Energy Conservation Code

Page 5 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

3. DESIGN BASES AND PARAMETERS

3.1. SITE LOCATION

The plant is located in the Western Part of the Qatar Peninsula- State of Qatar.
Latitude: 25º north
Longitude: 51º east
Altitude: 3.85 m

3.2. CLIMATE CONDITIONS

Weather conditions to be considered for HVAC calculations are the following:

Summer Design Dry bulb Temperature: 47 ºC


Summer Design Wet bulb Temperature: 30 ºC
Daily Range: 11ºC
Winter Design Dry bulb Temperature: 10 ºC
Winter Design relative humidity: 90%
Maximum recorded temperature: 52 ºC
Lowest recorded temperature: 7ºC
Absolute maximum relative humidity: 100%
Predominantly high humidity and saline ambient.

3.3. INDOOR CONDITIONS

The internal design conditions are determined on the basis of personnel comfort and building
operational requirements. The following list provides a guide to most types of rooms within the
desalination plant, indicating indoor design temperature and humidity ranges. It is based onMFS.
Minimal Functional Specification for RAFA3 the New Water Plant at Ras Abu Fontas, Ventilation and
Air Conditioning, ASHRAE standards and acquired knowledge from similar plants.

These internal temperature and humidity conditions shall be maintained provided the external design
conditions are not exceeded:

Page 6 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

ROOM TEMPERATURE (dry bulb) Noise Level


and % RH (NC)
Summer Winter
Relay Rooms 24 ±2 ºC N/C 35-45
Control Rooms 50±5% RH (< 30ºC)
Telecommunication Rooms
LV AC/DC Room
Battery Rooms 28 ±2 ºC 10 ºC min 45
RH N/C
Corridors 30 ±2 ºC 15±2 ºC 35-40
RH N/C
Toilets N/C (1) 40-50
Stores
Guard Room 26 ±2 ºC 22ºC 35-40
50±5% RH
Switchgear Rooms 28 ±2 ºC 10 ºC min 45
50±5% RH
Cable Basements Ambient Ambient 50
Warehouse and Chemical Storage <52ºC N/C 50
Chlorine Building RH N/C
CO2 Generation Building (2)
DAF Building
Waste Water Treatment Building
Pump Rooms <52ºC N/C
Transformers rooms RH N/C
(2), (3)
Workshop 15oC to 30oC; RH N 50
Offices 24 ±1 ºC 20±1 ºC 35-40
Prayer Rooms RH N/C
Meeting rooms
Break rooms
Main Process building <45ºC (3) N/C
RH N/C
Membrane Store <35oC (3) 50
RH N/C

Page 7 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

N/C Not Controlled


(1) Indirect cooling only by spill air
(2) Rooms with ventilation only, without cooling devices. The air flow will be based on selecting
whichever is greater between achieving the specified number of a.c.h. or keeping 5ºC delta T
(52ºC max) while normal operation at design conditions.
(3) Requires Equipment Vendor confirmation

3.4. VENTILATION AND FRESH AIR SUPPLY

The buildings will be ventilated to provide the necessary environmental conditions for the operation of
the equipment and for comfort and safety of staff. Minimum ventilation change rates to be considered
are the following:

ROOM TYPE MINIMUM VENTILATION RATE


Toilets 8 a.c.h. or 36 l/s per wc. (1)
Offices, canteens, break rooms, prayer rooms 10 l/s person
Corridors (occupied areas) 0,3 l/s m2
Stores, warehouses 4 a.c.h. (1) (5)
Stores, warehouse provided of cooling 0,3 l/s m2 (1)
systems
Chemical stores 7,5 l/s m2
Workshop 8 l/s pers
Battery/UPS rooms (2)
Pump Room 6 a.c.h (3)
Transformers Rooms 6 a.c.h (3)
Electrical Rooms 0,3 l/s m2
Main Process Building 3 a.c.h
DAF Building (water tanks) 6 a.c.h (3)
Warehouse and Chemical Storage 3 a.c.h (3)
CO2 Generation Building
Waste Water Treatment Building
Chlorine Building 8 a.c.h. (3) (4)

(1) Negative pressure

Page 8 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

(2) Ventilation rate for Battery Rooms to be calculated to keep hydrogen concentration under
1%, but in any case, not less than 6 a.c.h. These rooms will be kept under slight negative
pressure (20 Pa). No re-circulation air from the battery room.
(3) The air flow will be based on selecting whichever is greater between achieving the indicated
a.c.h. rate or keeping 5ºC delta T (52ºC max) while normal operation at design conditions.
(4) Only the conventional ventilation system for the chlorination room. Chlorination exhaust
system in case of leakages is not included here.
(5) This value is for rooms provided of ventilation systems only. If they are provided of cooling
systems, fresh air rate will be reduced to 0,3 l/s m2 in order to get certain air renovation
without penalizing unduly the cooling systems and the energy consumption

3.5. PRESSURIZATION

HVAC systems serving enclosed hazardous areas will be designed to provide a negative pressure and
HVAC systems serving air conditioned non-hazardous areas shall be designed to maintain a minimum
positive pressure. The maximum pressure shall be limited to ensure that no excessive pressure
differentials occur that may affect the opening and closing of doors.

3.6. AIR QUALITY

Filtration will be selected according to ASHRAE Standards 52.1-1992 and 52.2-1999. Each air
handling unit shall incorporate two stages filtration.
Pre-filtration shall be greater than 90% arrestance in accordance with dust spot efficiency test
ASHRAE standard 52.1 and EN 779.
Final filtration shall be achieved by rigid style cartridge filters, dust spot efficiency greater than 80%
(MERV13). In principle, it is not considered necessary to place chemical filters for any room.

Filters will be in accordance with Section 22 part 4 of QCS 2014.

Fresh air intake sections will incorporate a sand trap louver with access for sand removal. All fresh air
inlet and exhaust louvers shall be designed to prevent rain and excess deposit entry at the operating
velocities. Louvers shall comply with QCS section 22 part 6. Pressure drop at 2 m/s average face
velocity shall not exceed 85 Pa.

Page 9 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

3.7. IMPUT DATA FOR THERMAL LOADS CALCULATION

3.7.1. INTERNAL LOAD CRITERIA FOR BUILDINGS

3.7.1.1. Loads from Occupants

Heat gain from people varies depending on the activity being performed in the space. The following
values will be considered depending on this activity:

Activity Level Sensible Heat Gain Latent Heat Gain


(W-person) (W/person)

Seated at rest 67,4 35,2

Office Work 71,8 60,1

Sedentary Work 82,1 79,1

Medium Work 86,5 133,4

Heavy Work 153,9 271,1

3.7.1.2. Loads from Lighting

Loads from lighting will vary according to each stay. In general, a value of 20 W/m2 will be
considered, unless other information is given.

3.7.1.3. Loads from Equipment

For each room it will be considered the heat dissipation from equipment, according to information
given by process engineers and electricity engineers. Particular attention will be paid to heat
dissipation of pump motors, VSDS and switchboards.

Page 10 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

3.7.2. BUILDING ENVELOPE

According to architectural design, U values for walls and roofs are the following:

Wall
Wall Details Thermal Insulated block
Outside Surface Color ………… Medium
Absorptivity ………………….. 0,675
Overall U-Value ……………. 0,446 W/(m²-°K)
Wall Layers Details (Inside to Outside)
Thickness Density Specific Ht. R-Value Weight
kJ / (kg -
Layers mm kg/m³ (m²-K)/W kg/m²
°K)
Inside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,12064 0,0
Internal plaster 30,000 1601 0.84 0,035 48
Termoblock 140,00 28 0,84 1,998 0,3
External plaster 30,00 1601 0,84 0,035 48
Outside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,05864 0,0
Totals 200 - 2,24 96,4

Page 11 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Inverted flat roofing

Roof Details
Outside Surface Color ........... Medium
Absorptivity ................................ 0,675
Overall U-Value .......................... 0,260 W/(m²-°K)
Roof Layers Details (Inside to Outside)
Thickness Density Specific Ht. R-Value Weight
Layers mm kg/m³ kJ / (kg - °K) (m²-°K)/W kg/m²
Inside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,12064 0,0
203mm HW concrete block 300,000 977,1 0,84 0,28889 293,1
sloping concrete 150,000 640,7 0,84 0,86668 96,1
Asphalt roll 1,588 1121,3 1,51 0,02698 1,8
Extruded Polyestirene 80,000 35,0 1,45 2,20000 2,8
Concrete paving 50,000 640,7 0,84 0,28889 32,0
Outside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,05864 0,0
Totals 581,588 - 3,85072 425,9

Steel Wall Panel

Wall Details
Outside Surface Color ........... Medium
Absorptivity ................................ 0,675
Overall U-Value .......................... 0,410 W/(m²-°K)
Wall Layers Details (Inside to Outside)
Thickness Density Specific Ht. R-Value Weight
Layers mm kg/m³ kJ / (kg - °K) (m²-°K)/W kg/m²
Inside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,12064 0,0
Steel siding 1,524 7688,9 0,42 0,00003 11,7
RSI-2.3 batt insulation 101,600 8,0 0,84 2,25782 0,8
Steel siding 1,524 7688,9 0,42 0,00003 11,7
Outside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,05864 0,0
Totals 104,648 - 2,43717 24,2

Page 12 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Light Weight Roof

Roof Details
Outside Surface Color ........... Medium
Absorptivity ................................ 0,675
Overall U-Value .......................... 0,220 W/(m²-°K)

Roof Layers Details (Inside to Outside)


Thicknes Specific
Density R-Value Weight
s Ht.
kJ / (kg - (m²-
Layers mm kg/m³ kg/m²
°K) °K)/W
Inside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,12064 0,0
Steel siding 1,524 7688,9 0,42 0,00004 11,7
100mm insulation 100,000 40,0 2,00 4,37000 4,0
Steel siding 1,524 7688,9 0,42 0,00004 11,7
Outside surface resistance 0,000 0,0 0,00 0,05864 0,0
Totals 103,048 - 4,54935 27,4

3.8. AIR DISTRIBUTION

3.8.1. DUCTS

Ductwork sizing and design will be in accordance with ASHRAE and SMACNA standards. Metallic
ducts will be constructed as specified in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal
and Flexible.

In general, all the supply and extract galvanized ductwork will be designed for low pressure ductwork
according to Section 22 part 6 of QCS 2014, unless otherwise specified. Some ductworks in the
buildings with higher thermal loads, such as Local Contral Building, might be designed as Medium
Pressure Ductwork. In any case, they will meet the requirements of ASHRAE, SMACNA and QCS
2014.

Page 13 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

In general, ducts in occupied areas will be designed with the following air velocities:
- Primary ducts: 8,5 m/s
- Branch ducts: 5 m/s
- Air outlets: 3 m/s
- Max. Pressure Drop: 1,25 Pa/m

For unmanned technical areas, shafts, outdoor branches etc, maximum design velocity will be 12 m/s.
Additionally, the following air velocities will be observed:
- Ground level shaft exits. At ground level: 2,5 m/s
- Elevated Shaft Exits. 5 m/s

Ductwork passing through fire rated walls will be provided of fire dampers/fire smoke dampers.
Ductwork will be provided of the required volume dampers for proper balancing of air system.

Access doors will be provided in the ductwork in the following locations:


- At all automatic control dampers
- On both upstream and downstream sides of each reheat coil sound trap and in-line fan.
- On both upstream and downstream side at each duct airflow and pressure measuring device,
so that full access is available at every pitot tube (where applicable).

3.8.2. ROOM AIR DISTRIBUTION

Terminal air supply grilles and diffusers will be provided to achieve optimum air distribution and
diffusion within the space to achieve the most comfortable conditions for occupants, or a proper air
distributions in case of unmanned rooms.

Terminal velocities within occupied spaces will be maintained below 0.25 m/s in order to avoid
creating cold draughts.

Extract in hazardous areas shall be appropriate for the gas group classification. For example, Hydrogen
gas shall require capture at the highest point within a room and hydrocarbons require low level extract
as they are heavier than air.

Page 14 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Louvers will comply with CQS section 22 part 6.


Design air velocities in singular elements of the ductwork are the following:

• Louvers velocities:
- Fresh air intake (at roof): 3.3 m/s max. through free area.
- Fresh air intake (at grade): 3.05 m/s max. through free area.
- Relief/Exhaust: 5,1-7.6 m/s through free area
- Undercuts: 1,27 m/s

• Damper velocities:
- Fresh air intake (at roof): 5 m/s maximum
- Toilet exhaust air: 5-7,6 m/s

• Coil velocities:
- Cooling coils: 2 m/s maximum

• Fan velocities:
- Low velocity, Low pressure: 8-10,2 m/s outlet velocity
- High vel. (exhaust), Medium pres.: 10,2-17,7m/s outlet vel.

3.9. REFRIGERANTS

The selected refrigerant will provide optimum operating performance and minimum maintenance
requirements. They will also be commercially readily available for the life span of the Cooling Plant.

The refrigerants to be considered include R134a, R404A, R407C, R410A and R420A. Careful
consideration must also be given to the high ambient temperature and marine ambient.

Page 15 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

3.10. ENERGY SAVINGS

It will be considered International Energy Conservation Code 2012, as well as QCS 2014 Section 22
part 7.

3.10.1. DUCT INSULATION

Insulation will be provided for all air conditioning supply ducts. Blanket wrap will be used in
concealed spaces and rigid board where exposed in mechanical equipment rooms. Insulation will
comply with QCS section 22 part 7.

Duct insulation shall be fiberglass type with reinforced aluminium foil (48 kg/m3 of density). The
insulation will be fastened with adhesive of high quality and thermal conductivity of not more than
0,037 W/mºC. It will comply with A fire resistance rating.

In the case of exposed cold air ducts, they will be additionally protected with 200 g/m2 canvas cover
adhered between two coats of fungicidal protective fire resistant lagging adhesive.

The requirements of duct insulation thickness will generally be:

- Supply air ducts: 50 mm


- Outdoor air ducts: 25 m
- Exhaust air ducts: 50 mm (for exhaust to reclaim the energy)

Insulated ductwork located outdoor shall be shielded with 0.75 mm galvanized steel sheet as casing.

Flexible connections and connections to diffusers will be insulated with 25 mm thick, 24 kg/m3
density reinforced aluminium foil faced, flame resistant, flexible fiber glass insulation. It will be
overlapped onto adjacent insulation and sealed with adhesive duct tape to give good closure.

A minimum of 50 mm rigid board insulation will be provided for all outside air ductwork. The
insulation will be the same as per exposed ductwork except that it shall be covered with fibre glass
cloth 200 g/m2.

Page 16 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Circular supply and return air ductwork will be insulated with flexible fibre glass blanket 24 kg/m3
density, and covered with reinforced aluminium foil. Blanket thickness will be 50 mm compressed to
25 mm during installation for internal ducts and 100 mm compressed to 50 mm for external ducts.

Battery rooms exhaust ducting will be insulated to avoid condensation on the external surface of the
ducts.

3.10.2. PIPES INSULATION

Pipes will be thermally insulated with rigid section of fibre glass insulation with density of 65kg/m3,
having a thermal conductivity factor of 0.03 W/m2/K at 10 ºC with self-applied aluminium craft paper.
The minimum thickness will be as per ASHRAE Std. 90.1:

INSULATION NOMINAL PIPE SIZE OR TUBE SIZE


CONDUCTIVITY (inches)
FLUID CONDUCTIVITY Mean <1 1 to <11/2 11/2 to <4 4 to ≥8
OPERATING Btu*inch/(h ft2 ºF) Rating <8
TEMPERATURE Temp ºF
RANGE (ºK)
INSULATION THICKNESS (inches)
40-60ºF 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1 1 1
<40 ºF 0.20-0.26 50 0.5 1 1 1 1.5

3.10.3. HVAC EQUIPMENT PERFOMANCE REQUIREMENTS

HVAC equipment performance shall meet the requirements set on International Energy Conservation
Code, Section C403.

Page 17 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

4. HVAC SYSTEM

In this chapter, a proposal of HVAC systems for each of the buildings is given.

4.1. MAIN PROCESS BUILDING

This is the building where the main process of Reverse Osmosis takes place, including, among others,
pumps and membrane skids.
The process of reverse osmosis involves great water flows circulating through the building with
elevated pipe surfaces in contact with the room air, so that we could say that this process acts as a huge
heat exchanger, where sea water at a quite stable low temperature (compared to outdoor temperature),
dissipates heat loads from pump motors and keep indoor conditions into acceptable low temperature
values.

This fact makes unnecessary to provide cooling systems to this building, because indoor design
conditions, shown in chapter 3.3 can be achieved with the process itself. As normal operation
philosophy, shutdown of plant is by train wise, one train will be shut down and others will be in
working conditions. Therefore the sea water involved in the process of other trains will equalize the
temperature.

Therefore, HVAC for this building consists only of ventilation devices to provide some air changes to
obtain certain indoor air quality. The design ventilation rate for this building is 3 a.c.h. as indicated in
chapter 3.4, what provides enough indoor air quality and helps to evacuate excess of heat from pumps
too.

The ventilation system consists of some roof type fans that allow air exhaust. Fresh air enters through
sand trap louvers located on the bottom of the enclosures.

Additionally, this system will be used for smoke exhaust as well, so that fans will be fire resistant type.
Emergency air exhaust air flow will be calculated in accordance with International Fire code, but in
any case, not less than 6 a.c.h.

Page 18 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Proposed exhaust fans are roof mounted axial fans with vertical air discharge configuration, for air
extract. 304 stainless steel casing corrosion resistant High grade die-cast aluminum blades locked
within a pressed sheet steel hub. Aluminium backdraft shutter and bird proof outlet. These equipment
will have redundancy based on the principle of n+1.

Proposed roof mounted axial fan Backdraft dumper in fan

Fresh air will be provided to replace exhausted air, by means of natural ventilation with sand trap
louvers located on the building façades. These devices have a degree of separation of sand and large
dust particles. The vertically arranged sections and holes for sand drainage ensure the sand trap louvre
is self-cleaning and maintenance-free.
They will be located on the bottom of the walls, so that air passes along the entire room in its path to
the exhaust fans.

Page 19 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

4.2. ELECTRICAL BUILDING

Electrical building is the place where most of the switchboards, VSDs and other electrical equipment
for Main Process Building and other buildings are located. Therefore, there is a huge load from
equipment and wires dissipation. On the other hand, these switchboards, VSDs, batteries, etc. require
some limit temperature to operate in optimal conditions, which are listed in chapter 3.3.

In general terms, we could say than no occupation is expected in this building, so that the HVAC
system is mainly designed to meet indoor required parameters for electrical equipment necessities.

Electrical rooms will be fully air conditioned, by means of packaged air conditioning units of the
single zone direct expansion type. Each unit will be fully packaged with all components fully
assembled, and they will be located on the roof of the building.

Each air conditioning unit will be connected to a ducted insulated air supply system, that distributes
the cooled air to the electrical rooms and discharges through supply grilles.

Since this building is a “critical building”, so that shall the HVAC fail and compromise the “Process
Operation or Plant Safety”, HVAC equipment will be provided n+1 redundancy.

Electrical rooms will be over-pressurised to reduce air infiltration from surrounding areas. The air
tightness of electrical equipment has to be sound, and the degree of over-pressurization will be
sufficient to neutralize the influence of wind forces, temperature differences and surrounding process
spaces, which will be operating under negative pressure. Return air flow for switchboard rooms will be
approximately 90% of supply air flow, so that these rooms will be slightly over-pressurized.

4.3. TRANSFORMERS ROOMS

Process transformers are located inside the buildings in outdoor type bays. An adequate ventilation rate
must be guaranteed by means of openings to the outside, located at least at two opposite walls. These
openings should be large enough, and located so that air inlets are at the bottom of the enclosure and
air outlets at the upper of the opposite wall, so that air in its path passes through the transformers.

Page 20 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Dimensions of air inlet/outlets have to be calculated based on heat dissipation of each transformer that
will be provided by the electrical designers.

In case there is only one external wall, mechanical ventilation will be provided, so that air enters the
transformer rooms thought air inlet grilles and it is removed by fans located in the opposite side of the
room.

Air inlets will be provided of sand trap louvers, similar type as described at 4.1.

The ventilation airflow will be calculated based on heat dissipated by pump motors and the
temperature differences between outdoor and required indoor conditions, but at least, 6 a.c.h. will be
provided. Temperature difference considered for calculations will be 5ºC. Therefore, when maximum
outdoor design temperature of 47ºC occurs, there will be 52ºC within the room. This temperature must
be confirmed by electrical designers.

Redundancy will be considered, based on the n+1 principle.

Operation of exhaust fans will be governed by a temperature sensor located in a representative point
within the room. Ventilation system will be communicated with fire alarm as well, so that in case of
fire it receives inputs from the fire unit, so that it stops the fans.

4.4. LOCAL CONTROL ROOM

To meet required indoor conditions in these rooms, AC units DX type will be installed. This
equipment will ducted packaged air conditioning units or split type systems, depending the resultant
thermal loads of the room. In any case, conditions of chapter 3.3 will be observed.

HVAC system for this room will be provided of an electric heater in the main supply duct, sized for
maintaining the RH required for the room., so that in case of return air humidity is too high or return
air temperature is too low the duct mounted electric heater will be operated to increase the air
temperature and reduce the relative air humidity.

Page 21 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

4.5. BATTERY ROOMS

Precision air conditioning units shall be installed in this type of rooms to control both temperature and
humidity. This equipment will be provided of n+1 redundancy.

Additionally, battery rooms will be kept under slight negative pressure (20 Pa). No air will re-circulate
from the battery room. This will be achieved by two (duty/stand-by) explosion proof bifurcated two
speed fans, which will be installed complete with extract insulated ductwork, grilles and louvers. The
fans will be with the additional fitting of a spark minimizing impeller track and suitable for Group II
gases (battery room applications). The entire system will be proofed against corrosive gases.

The fans will be interlocked with the battery charger systems so that during normal trickle charge a
single fan will operate at slow sepeed and at high speed during normal boost charge. During boost
charge the additional air supply requirements will be met by wall mounted electrically powered on-off
damper with external sand trap louver all mounted at smi-low level in an external wall. Damper
actuator shall be interlocked with the battery charger system.

Air flow/pressure switches shall be provided across the battery room extract fans to monitor their
performance and provide automatic changeover in the event of supply fan failure.

4.6. OFFICES

For offices, meeting rooms, prayer rooms, break rooms, etc. cooling systems combined with make-up
air systems will be provided.

For these buildings one of these solutions will be adopted, depending on the resulting thermal loads
and the building configuration:
Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF), comprised of an outdoor condensing unit and several indoor
evaporators, which are inter connected by refrigerant pipes, in case of groups of offices in a same
building.
Independent split type systems, in the case of small separated offices.
Packaged air conditioning ducted units.

Page 22 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

In any case, make up air handling units will provide the treated fresh air for ventilation of the rooms.
Toilets, wash areas and lockers will have a separate dirty extract system with make-up air from
adjacent spaces.

4.7. PUMP ROOMS

Pump rooms will be provided of ventilation. The ventilation airflow will be calculated based on heat
dissipated by pump motors and the temperature differences between outdoor and required indoor
conditions, but at least, 6 a.c.h. will be provided. Temperature difference considered for calculations
will be 5ºC. Therefore, when maximum outdoor design temperature of 47ºC occurs, there will be 52ºC
within the room. This temperature must be confirmed by electrical designers.

To achieve this ventilation rate, pump rooms will be provided of mechanical ventilation in order to
dissipate the excess heat arising from the pump motors and to prevent the build-up of stale air,
although there is no need for a cooling system as the contained equipment temperature requirements
can be achieved just through the ventilation system. These indoor design conditions are shown in
chapter 3.3

The exhaust fans will be installed located on the upper part of the building façade, and they will be
designed so that there is n+1 redundancy. They will be axial type units, and in order to protect the fan
from the sand entry it will be configured with an airflow direction from the motor to the impeller.
Furthermore, they will be equipped with louvre shutters on their exhaust side to prevent the air
entering the building in case of no operation of the fans, and inlet guard protection to prevent any
contact with the fan impeller.

Page 23 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Fresh air will be provided to replace exhausted air, by means of natural ventilation with sand trap
louvers located on the opposite façade, similar type as described at chapter 4.1. These devices will
have a degree of separation of sand and large dust particles. The vertically arranged sections and holes
for sand drainage ensure the sand trap louver is self-cleaning and maintenance-free. They will be
located on the bottom of the walls, so that air passes along the entire room in its path to the exhaust
fans.

Operation of exhaust fans will be governed by a temperature sensor located in a representative point
within the room. Ventilation system will be communicated with fire alarm as well, so that in case of
fire it receives inputs from the fire unit, so that it stops the fans.

4.8. DAF BUIDING

There are three well differentiated areas within the DAF Building: the chambers where the vertical
mixers operate, the sea water storage tanks where the pre-treatment process takes place and the
equipment hall.

For the mixing chambers, as they will be permanently filled with water no ventilation requirements
need to be fulfilled.

On the other hand, for the equipment hall, same criteria as per Pump Rooms will be applicable,
therefore, we will only describe here the systems for the Sea Water Storage Tanks.

Page 24 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

Ventilation air rate to be considered for this room is 6 a.c.h. because of the high humidity level
expected in this part of the building.

This will be achieved through exhaust fans located on the upper part of the building façade, and they
will be designed so that there is n+1 redundancy. Air enters the room through air inlet grilles with sand
trap louvers in the opposite façade, in a similar way than that described at chapter 4.6.

4.9. WORKSHOP

This type of building usually has two different areas: one for administrative rooms, and the other area
for workshop use, with different HVAC necessities each. The HVAC systems will be the following:

o For offices areas, the systems will be as described at chapter 4.6.


o For Workshop areas, they will have their own independent HVAC systems. Depending
on the thermal load of these rooms, they will be packaged air conditioning units or split
type unit.

4.10. WAREHOUSE

As in the previous case, Warehouse also has two different areas: one for administrative rooms and the
other for storage use, with different HVAC necessities. The HVAC system will be the following:

o For offices areas, the systems will be as described at chapter 4.6.


o For storage areas, they will be provided of ventilation system. Depending on the air
flow, this can be achieved through natural ventilation or through mechanical ventilation
with wall mounted axial fans.
o Special attention will be paid to membrane storage, to meet the temperature
requirements set at 3.3 and to be confirmed by the vendor. In this case, and depending
on the actual thermal load of the room, it will be provided of a packaged air
conditioning unit or split type units.

Page 25 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

4.11. WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUIDING

This building will be fully ventilated.


In order to achieve the design ventilation rates set at chapter 3.4, one of these methods will be used:
- Natural ventilation by openings at least at two opposite facades, so that air enters through
one side and passes along the entire room in its path to the opposite side openings. These
openings will be provided of sand trap louvers.
- Mechanical ventilation by exhaust axial type fans, located on the upper part of the building
façade. Fresh air will be provided to replace exhausted air, by means of natural ventilation
with sand trap louvers located on the opposite façade, on the bottom of the walls, so that air
passes along the entire room in its path to the exhaust fans.

The first method will be preferable if architecture allows it.

4.12. CO2 GENERATION BUILDING

Similar criteria as per Waste Water Treatment at chapter 4.11.

4.13. CHLORINE BUILDING

This building comprises the storage and processing area for chlorine.

In general terms, it could be said that occupation is not expected in this building, so that the HAVC
system is mainly designed to meet indoor required parameters for equipment needs.

This store and processing area requires mechanical ventilation in order to prevent the build-up of stale
air and there is no need for a cooling system as the temperature requirements can be achieved just
through the ventilation system.

Therefore, HVAC for these rooms consists only of ventilation devices to provide 8 air changes per
hour which ensure certain indoor air quality within the storage room and chlorination room, as
described in the next chapters.

Page 26 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

This will be achieved through exhaust axial type fans, located on the upper part of the building façade.
Fresh air will be provided to replace exhausted air, by means of natural ventilation with sand trap
louvers located on the opposite façade, on the bottom of the walls, so that air passes along the entire
room in its path to the exhaust fans. Redundancy of the equipment will be considered, based on the
n+1 principle.

HVAC design includes only the conventional ventilation system for the chlorination room.
Additionally, a chlorine gas detection and exhaust system will be provided by the package unit
supplier. In any case, conventional HVAC system will be coordinated with the chlorine gas abatement
system so that in case of chlorine leakage, HVAC is stopped.

4.14. LIME STONE CONTACTORS BUILDING

Pumping area within this building will be treated as a normal pump room as described 4.7. The other
part of the building will be opened, so that there are no ventilation requirements.

4.15. CORROSION PROTECTION

Because of the coastal location, the atmosphere shall be particularly aggressive and all externally
located plant will be appropriately protected by a suitable paint finish.

Air-cooled chiller or condenser coils will be manufactured from copper tubes with copper fins electro
tinned. Alternatively a proprietary protective coating may be applied by the manufacturer. The coating
may affect heat transfer and the Contractor will ensure that this is taken into account during equipment
selection. Corrosion protection proposals must be submitted to the Client for review and approval.

4.16. HVAC CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

Since Unitary HVAC Equipment will be selected, the HVAC Control System shall be the Vendor
standard. However, it will be ensured that all safety and process requirements are met and that remote
start stop and status indication is made available via the DCS.

Page 27 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211002 HVAC DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 11-Jan16

4.17. VIBRATION

All motive plant will be isolated from the building structure by the use of anti vibration mountings and
will be connected with the rest of the system in which they are installed with suitable flexible
connections designed to minimise the transmission of vibration. Where necessary, in critical areas,
pipe work and ductwork shall be supported from adjustable spring hangers.

Where terminal grilles, ductwork and diffusers etc., are in contact with walls, ceilings etc, non-
intercellular neoprene strips between the contact areas will be installed.

Anti vibration mountings will be spring, rubber in shear type, or a combination of both to suit the
vibration frequency to be isolated. Spring mountings will be of the enclosed type, suitable for
restraining the spring in position on failure.

Where plant shall produce excessive out of balance forces, these will be mounted on inertia blocks,
with the anti vibration mountings supporting the blocks.

4.18. POWER SUPPLY

In general terms, all HVAC equipment will be electrically supplied from the General Services Main
Distribution Board (GSDB) located in the Electrical Building.

In order to have a greater safety degree in critical HVAC systems, and even when they will also be
provided of redundancy, the next systems will be supplied from Essential Power (Emergency Supply
System):

- Exhaust fans of Main Process Building


- HVAC for Membrane Storage Room at Warehouse Building
- HVAC systems of Electrical Rooms and Control Rooms
- HVAC systems of UPS/battery rooms.

Page 28 of 28
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Document No. RAFA3-AAC-211003

Document Title FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001
TTCL Job No. F-043
AA Job No. 155301

Total 48 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

3/A 01/03/16 ISSUED FOR


MP IA RM MS
CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


0/A 14-Apr -15 FOR REVIEW
1/A 18-Nov-15 FOR REVIEW
2/A 22-Dec-15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2/B 30-Dec-15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
3/A 01-March-16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

Page 2 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

CONTENTS

1. AIM ...................................................................................................................................................5

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ...................................5

2.1. SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION...............................................5

2.2. STANDARDS ............................................................................................................................5

3. DESIGN BASIS AND PARAMETERS...........................................................................................6

3.1. USE AND OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION OF THE BUILDINGS ..................................6

3.1.1. ELECTRICAL BUILDING ................................................................................................7

3.1.2. MAIN PROCESS BUILDING ...........................................................................................7

3.1.3. DAF BUILDING ................................................................................................................8

3.1.4. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 1 .......................................................................8

3.1.5. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 2 .......................................................................8

3.1.6. ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ......................................................................................9

3.1.7. WAREHOUSE AND CHEMICAL STORAGE BUILDING ............................................9

3.1.8. LIME STONE CONTACTOR..........................................................................................10

3.1.9. CHLORINE BUILDING ..................................................................................................10

3.1.10. CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING ..............................................................................10

3.1.11. WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUILDING ............................................................11

3.1.12. CO2 GENERATION BUILDING .................................................................................11

4. DESIGN CRITERIA OF THE FIREFIGHTING SYSTEMS AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEM ....11

4.1.1. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS ............................................................................12

4.1.2. STANDPIPE SYSTEM ....................................................................................................13

4.1.3. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS .........................................................................14

Page 3 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

4.1.4. AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGHISHING AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS USING


CLEAN AGENT .............................................................................................................................15

4.1.5. WATER SPRAY FIXED SYSTEM .................................................................................15

4.1.6. HYDRANTS .....................................................................................................................16

4.1.7. FIREWATER ....................................................................................................................17

4.1.8. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM .................................................................18

5. FIREFIGHTING AND DETECTION SYSTEMS AT EACH BUILDING ..................................22

5.1. ELECTRICAL BUILDING .....................................................................................................22

5.2. MAIN PROCESS BUILDING .................................................................................................25

5.3. DAF BUILDING ......................................................................................................................27

5.4. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 1 ............................................................................29

5.5. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 2 ............................................................................30

5.6. ADMINISTRATION BUILDING ...........................................................................................31

5.7. WAREHOUSE BUILDING.....................................................................................................32

5.8. PUMP ROOM AT LIME STONE CONTACTORS ...............................................................33

5.9. CHLORINE BUILDING .........................................................................................................35

5.10. CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING .....................................................................................36

5.11. WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUILDING ....................................................................37

5.12. CO2 GENERATION BUILDING ........................................................................................38

5.13. SUMMARIZING TABLE ....................................................................................................39

Page 4 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

1. AIM
This document includes the description of the general criteria for the Fire Protect design of Ras Abu
Fontas A3 Desalination Plant.

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

2.1. SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE DOCUMENTATION

The bases for Fire Protection Design and calculations are set in the following documents:
- KAHRAMAA. Qatar Power Transmission System Expansion. Phase 11. Stage1- Substations.
Section 3.3.15.1 Technical Specification for Safety.
- KAHRAMAA. Qatar Power Transmission System Expansion. Phase 11. Stage1- Substations.
Section 3.4.15.1 Fire Safety Systems
- Minimal Functional Specification (MFS) for A3 New Water Plant at Ras Abu Fontas

2.2. STANDARDS

Following standards and guidelines shall be observed:


- State of Qatar Government Specifications, Regulations, Notices and Circulars.
- Fire Safety Standards of the Civil Defence Department of the Ministry of Interior of the State of
Qatar.
- Rules and regulations for Plumbing Services prepared by the Qatar General Electricity and
Water Corporation.
- Regulations on Internal Water Installations and Connection Services produced by Kahramaa.
- International Building Code Requirements (IBC)
- International Fire Code (IFC)
- Material ASTM/ASME/ANSI/API
- NFPA Standards, including among others:
o NFPA 10 – Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers.
o NFPA 12 – Standard on Carbon Dioxide Extinguishing Systems.
o NFPA 13 – Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
o NFPA 14 – Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.

Page 5 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

o NFPA 15 - Standard for Water Spray Fixed Systems for fire Protection.
o NFPA 24 - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their
Appurtenances.
o NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
o NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
o NFPA 72 – National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
o NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.NFPA 400 - Hazardous Materials Code.
o NFPA 2001 – Standard on Clean Fire Extinguishing Systems.
o NFPA 5000 – Building Construction and Safety Code.

3. DESIGN BASIS AND PARAMETERS


The plant is located in the Western Part of the Qatar Peninsula- State of Qatar, within the existing Ras
Abu Fontas Power & Water Stations which is located about 10 km from Doha.

Latitude: 25º north

Longitude: 51º east

Altitude: 2 m

The climatic conditions are severe, with ambient temperatures reaching up to 55ºC in summer time,
with high humidity and marine ambient, what will be taken into account when designing any outdoor
equipment or pipes. Additionally, protection against dust and sand for outdoor equipment requires
special attention

All required fire protection and detection systems necessary to meet the aforementioned standards and
to guarantee safety life safety of the occupants, the protection of the buildings and the continued
operations of the facility.

3.1. USE AND OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATION OF THE BUILDINGS

First of all, the fire hazard, Construction Type and Use Group of each building will be analysed in
order to identify the required means of egress, detection system and fire protection system to be
provided in accordance with the operations, hazards and code requirements.

Process facilities are segregated into risk areas for the purposes of fire protection system design.

Page 6 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

3.1.1. ELECTRICAL BUILDING

This is the building hosting the Electrical Switch Rooms and the Local Control Room, and is located in
the middle of the two halls of the Main Process Building. Some office services will be hosted within
this building too.

In the Electrical Building the most important elements considering the risk associated to the activities
developed in the building are:

- Switchgear
- Electrical equipment
- Control equipment
- Batteries
- Cable Spreading areas (raised floor)
- Auxiliary transformers
Then according to Chapter 40 “Industrial Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code this area can be classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy
ordinary hazard industrial operations (section 40.1.2.1.2).

3.1.2. MAIN PROCESS BUILDING

The Main Process Building holds the Reverse Osmosis Process into a steel frame shed. It is divided
into two main RO Halls. In the middle of them, a smaller concrete frame building is attached
comprising the Electrical Building.

In the Main Process Building the most important elements considering the risk associated to the
process developed in the building are electrical pumps. Also, no permanent occupancy must be
considered.

These occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations and according to NFPA 101 Life Safety
Code, This building is classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low hazard industrial
operations (section 40.1.2.1.2).

Page 7 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

3.1.3. DAF BUILDING

This building holds the first stage Pre-treatment of the “Model Process” and utilizes Coagulation and
Flotation technology through surface installed “Modular” concrete tanks.

DAF building comprises two levels, being the low level for modular concrete tanks, partially provided
with a steel framed upper level to support a clad enclosure mechanically ventilated by means of fans.
Two additional double high areas are attached to both sides of the DAF building, to house the pumps.

Ventilation shall be provided by suitable sized and located openings in low part of the walls and
covered with sand trap louvers, and fans in upper part of opposite facades of the building.

In the DAF Building the most important elements considering the risk associated to the process
developed in the building are pumps. Also, no permanent occupancy must be considered.

These occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations and according to Chapter 40 “Industrial
Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, this building is
classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low hazard industrial operations (section
40.1.2.1.2).

3.1.4. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 1

This building is attached to one side of the DAF building to house one of the intermediate pumping
stations.

In the Intermediate Pumping Station 1, the most important elements considering the risk associated to
the process developed in the building are pumps. Also, no permanent occupancy must be considered.

These occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations and according to Chapter 40 “Industrial
Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, this building is
classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low hazard industrial operations (section
40.1.2.1.2).

3.1.5. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 2

This building is attached to one side of the DAF building to house one of the intermediate pumping
stations.

Page 8 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

In the Intermediate Pumping Station 1, the most important elements considering the risk associated to
the process developed in the building are pumps. Also, no permanent occupancy must be considered.

These occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations and according to Chapter 40 “Industrial
Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, this building is
classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low hazard industrial operations (section
40.1.2.1.2).

3.1.6. ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

This building will be designed with administrative rooms; Office area, reception, restroom and
laboratory.

These occupancies conduct ordinary hazard business operations and according to Chapter 38 “New
Business Occupancies” 38.1.1. Classification of Occupancy of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, this
building is classified as Business Occupancy, according to section 6.1.11.

3.1.7. WAREHOUSE AND CHEMICAL STORAGE BUILDING

The design philosophy of this building is operating as Central Site Warehouse, Receipt and
Distribution Centre for Process Consumables and Small volume Chemical additions. Warehouse and
Chemical Storage building comprises three different areas:

o Administration area: with offices and restroom.


o Storage Area.
o Workshop

Related to Use and Occupancy classification the most restrictive area is the chemical storage area. The
stored chemicals are not flammable but some of them are oxidizer and also highly toxic. Therefore
according to Section 42 of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code and section 6.2.1.5 of NFPA 5000, this area
can be classified as Storage Occupancies.

The stored chemicals are not flammable, so that we can classify them according to 6.2.2.2 of NFPA
101 as Low Hazard Contents: “those of such low combustibility that no self-propagating fire therein
can occur”.

Page 9 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

3.1.8. LIME STONE CONTACTOR

Pums are the most important elements considering the risk associated to the process developed in the
lime stone contactors. Also, no permanent occupancy must be considered.

These occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations and according to Chapter 40 “Industrial
Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code this area can be
classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low hazard industrial operations (section
40.1.2.1.2).

3.1.9. CHLORINE BUILDING

This is the building in which chlorine loading operations are carried out, hosting the following uses:

 Chlorine drum store


 Chlorinator room

Inside this building the chlorine loading operations and also the chlorine storage activities are carried
out. Several chemical storages are also located in the outdoor area of the Chlorine Building. Chlorine
is not a flammable liquid. Therefore according to NFPA 101 Life Safety Code, this building is
classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy ordinary hazard industrial operations
(section 40.1.2.1.2)

3.1.10. CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

Chemical Dosing Building is a chemical material storage building. The stored chemicals are not
flammable but some of them are corrosive and reactive.

The design philosophy of this building is operating as dosing station

At this way, areas such as skids, big bags, antiscalant, sodium bisulphite skid, sodium hydroxide,
sulphuric acid day tanks, ferric chloride, etc. will be defined.

The different areas are limited with reinforced concrete bund walls.

Page 10 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Related to Use and Occupancy classification the most restrictive area is the chemical storage area, so
that according to section 42 of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code and section 6.2.1.5 of NFPA 5000, this
area can be classified as Storage Occupancies.

The stored chemicals are not flammable, so that we can classify them according to 6.2.2.2 of NFPA
101 as Low Hazard Contents: “those of such low combustibility that no self-propagating fire therein
can occur”.

3.1.11. WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUILDING

This is a building comprising feed pumps area, sludge pumps area and sludge silos area.

In the Waste Water Treatment Building the main issue is the pumping functions, then these
occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations and according to Chapter 40 “Industrial
Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the NFPA 101 Life Safety Code this area can be
classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low hazard industrial operations (section
40.1.2.1.2).

3.1.12. CO2 GENERATION BUILDING

Product water post treatment includes CO2 dosing, with requires onsite CO2 generation and injection
system, housed within this building. In case of leakage, ventilation system of this building, consisting
of air inlets through grilles in the lower part of a wall and exhaust fans in the upper part of the opposite
wall, ensure a perfect sweeping of the room air, so that no CO2 accumulation can be expected.

CO2 Building is a process building; then these occupancies conduct low hazard industrial operations
and according to Chapter 40 “Industrial Occupancies” 40.1.2. Classification of Occupancy of the
NFPA 101 Life Safety Code this area can be classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy
low hazard industrial operations (section 40.1.2.1.2).

4. DESIGN CRITERIA OF THE FIREFIGHTING SYSTEMS AND FIRE ALARM SYSTEM


It will be provided the required fire protection and detection system necessary for each building
according to the previous classification. The fire protection systems will be designed in accordance
with NFPA Codes, local standards and IFC.

Page 11 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

In this chapter it is defined which fire protection systems are required and shall apply to the plant:

4.1.1. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

All plant facilities will be provided with portable fire extinguishers.

The role of portable extinguishers is to response quickly to a fire incident. They have been located
along normal paths of travel, including exits from areas.

The number and type of fire extinguishers suitable for the hazards to meet is defined in the NFPA 10.

To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located.

Travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than that specified at NFPA 10 according to the
next tables:

Fire Extinguisher Size and Placement for Class A Hazards:

Fire Extinguisher Size and Placement for Class B Hazards:

Page 12 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Portable fire extinguishers will be installed in the following buildings and areas:

- Main Process building


- Electrical building
- DAF building
- Administration building
- Warehouse building
- Pump rooms
- Chlorination building
- Chemical Dosing building
- Waste Water Treatment building
- CO2 Generation Building

To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher of 9 kg, Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers of 4.5 kg and wheeled dry chemical fire extinguisher of 50 kg will be located at strategic
points in buildings.

Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 18 kg shall be installed that its top is
not more than 1.5 m above the floor.

Also the fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view.

4.1.2. STANDPIPE SYSTEM

Standpipe systems shall be provided in the Main Process Building SP1 and SP2.

Page 13 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

A Class II Standpipe system will be defined. A Class II standpipe system shall provide 1 ½” hose
stations to supply water for use primarily by building occupants or by the Civil Defense during initial
response. These are typically found in cabinets with 30.5 m of hose.

All hose connections and hose stations shall be unobstructed and shall be located not less than 0.9 m or
more than 1.5 m above the floor. The hose connection shall not be obstructed by the closed or open
door or other objects on the landing.

NFPA 14, Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, provides the design, layout, and water flow
requirements for the systems. The maximum pressure at any point in the system shall not exceed 350
psi. The design pressure is based on a residual pressure of 100 psi.

The location of the cabinets will be accessible and will be located so that all portions of the building
are within 9.1 m of a nozzle attached to 30.5 m of hose.

Standpipe system is not required in the other buildings according to the Life Safety Plan (DC1 & DC2)

4.1.3. AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS

According to the use and occupancy classification of the buildings, the only building to require an
automatic sprinkler system according to Sections 55.3 and 29.3.5.1.1 of NFPA 5000 is the Electrical
Building, considering that the fire area exceeds 1115m2 and the use and occupancy classification is
Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy ordinary hazard industrial operations.

However, according to 55.5.1 alternative systems are allowed in any occupancy where the character of
the fuel for fire is such that extinguishment or control of the fire is accomplished by a type of
automatic extinguishing system in lieu of automatic sprinkler system. Therefore, an alternative FM
200 system has been designed for electrical rooms (LV, MV, UPS and DC System rooms), designed
according to NFPA 2001 and they are described in the next sections.

On the other hand, an alternative water spray fixed system will be installed for Transformers Rooms,
designed according to NFPA 15 and described in the next sections.

Page 14 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

4.1.4. AUTOMATIC FIRE EXTINGHISHING AND SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS USING CLEAN


AGENT

As previously mentioned, a FM 200 system will be installed in electrical rooms of Electrical Building
as an alternative of automatic sprinklers, because it is more appropriate for the type of risk and
equipment within these rooms.

This system will be designed according to NPFA 2001, Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing
Systems, as well as Section 23, part 4.11 of CQS 2014.

For the FM200 automatic extinguishing system, the risk is classified as Class C for the large electrical
rooms: LV, MV, Local Control Station, (factor of safety of 1.35, per NFPA 2001 Section 5.4.2.5)
therefore the design shall be made considering a concentration of 7.83% with a flooding factor of 0.62
kg/m3 to discharge in 10 seconds.

For UPS Battery Room and DC System Room the risk is classified as Class A, and design shall be
made considering a concentration of 8,5%.with a flooding factor of 0,67 kg/m3.

This system is completed with all control wiring for detectors, alarms, abort stations, manual pull
stations, etc., controlled from a local fire extinguishing control panel at each room.

The concentration will be maintained 10 minutes or for a time period to allow for response by trained
personnel, as per NFPA 2001 section 5.6.

4.1.5. WATER SPRAY FIXED SYSTEM

Transformers Rooms will be provided of a Water Spray Fixed System, consisting of discharge nozzles
designed according to NFPA 15 to provide a specific water discharge pattern and distribution over the
surface area to be protected. It will be connected to the plant pipe network, supplied from the plant fire
water pumps, not in the scope of this project.

Water spray density shall be 10.2 lpm/m2 for project area of rectangular prism envelope of the
transformer.

Minimum operating pressure for any spray nozzle with orifice of 9,5 mm or less shall be 3.0 bar (g)
minimum.

Water velocity in the deluge valve manifold pipe taken from fire water main shall not exceed 5 m/s
(3,5 m/s for fire water main network pipe).

Page 15 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

The system shall send alarm signal to fire alarm panel at control room from alarm pressure switch
when the system operated.

Deluge valves shall be located near the protected transformer to be operated safely in an emergency.
Each deluge system shall be provided with an isolation gate valve located upstream of the deluge valve
and supervisory switches.

4.1.6. HYDRANTS

The buildings and site will be protected with fire hydrants. The spacing of the hydrants shall be in
accordance with NFPA 24.

The fire water distribution pipework is designed as a closed loop, or series of loops, so each
connection is fed from two directions and each feed is independent of the other.

The hydrant system is part of a global hydrant system of Ras Abu Fontas A3 Desalination Plant.

There are four different connection points to the global network.

Pipe used in the fire water main shall be made o HDPE (underground) or Hot dip galvanized carbon
steel (aboveground). HDPE manufacture selected is SDR-9, PE100, PN20 HDPE pipe and fitting. The
fusion type is Butt fusion and Electro fusion.

The fire water main shall be of closed loop deigned and shall be laid along the roads.

Butterfly type valve(s) with valve pit shall be provided strategically in the fire water main loops to
ensure adequate and alternate supply to all usage points in case of any fire water main line failure and
can be taken out of service for maintenance or repair without interfering with the fire water supply to
the area.

The Fire main shall be isolated with butterfly valves that no more than 300 m of line containing
hydrants and water spray systems. Only three water hydrants can be installed between block valves

Fire pipe will be designed underground, with the following sections:

Page 16 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Layout will be defined according to road design, only crossing roads when is totally necessary. In this
case, it will be reinforced with concrete to prevent damage.

All exposed sections of pipe and items such as Valve stems, Monitors and Hydrants shall be protected
from accidental damage by vehicles by motorway standard crash barriers.

Pressure gauges will be fitted at accessible locations in order to facilitate troubleshooting.

4.1.7. FIREWATER

Firewater will be supplied from the existing plant, so that no fire water tanks or fire pumps are
considered within the scope of this project.

It will be verified than existing fire plant has capacity enough to face the fire system for the new
projected plant.

The diameter of the fire water distribution pipe will be defined considering a water speed of 2-3 m/s.

The Firewater distribution piping sizes will be calculated based on design flow rates at the minimum
operating pressure, anywhere in the fire main, at all times of firefighting.

For the calculations:

Page 17 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

- The largest fire water demand of one fire risk areas shall be the maximum fire water demand
based on a single major fire breaking out in one fire risk area in any one time.
- Refer of NFPA standard for the fire water supply for the permanent fire fighting installation
should be based on providing a 2-hour supply for both items of the largest fixed fire
suppression system demand and the hose stream demand that not less than 500 gpm.(1890
L/min).
- For the purpose of estimating minimum fire water demand, followings shall be applied; - Fire
water demand for one fixed water spray system + two water hydrants.
- When estimating fire water demand for water hydrant, the following flow rate shall be used:
- 1(One) Water Hydrant Nozzle: 950 Lpm.

4.1.8. FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM

All functionally significant plant buildings critical to continued operation of the plant will be provided
with a fire alarm system. Fire detection and alarm systems shall be of the addressable type 1 and have
an addressable microprocessor based fire alarm control panel.

The fire alarm system shall be provided with at least two independent and reliable power supplies, one
primary and one standby.

The system shall be electrically supervised against short, ground and open wiring faults in the
detection circuit, alarm circuit, alarm and trouble relay coils. Any of these faults occurring shall cause
an audible and visual trouble indication at the control point.

The installation will be made in accordance with NFPA 72.

The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall monitor the fire protection systems in accordance with the
NFPA requirements.

Several detection systems will be applied in the different areas, according to:

- The operating characteristics of each detector must be compared to the proposed application.
- Fire detectors shall be selected based on the burning characteristics of the materials present and
the nature of location they will be used to protect.
- It’s important to consider height of the building, size of the room, ambient conditions
(temperature, humidity, corrosion, HVAC, ETC..)
Detection systems shall be provided in the next buildings:

Page 18 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

- Electrical Building.
- Main Process Building.
- DAF Building.
- Intermediate Pumping Stations.
- Administration Building.
- Warehouse and Chemical Storage Building.
- Chlorine Building.
- Chemical Dosing Building.
- Waste Water Treatment Building.
- CO2 Generation Building.

Particular characteristics and types of these detectors are given at the Calculation Sheets Document
and drawings for each building.

DETECTION SYSTEM SUMMARY TABLE


Electrical Building
Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Smoke detection
Ground floor MCP & Bell HVAC
through aspiration
MV Room
Smoke detection
Raised floor - -
through aspiration
H2 detector and
UPS Battery Room Ground floor MCP & Bell HVAC
thermal detector

DC System Room Ground floor Optical smoke MCP & Bell HVAC

Transformers Rooms Ground floor Heat MCP & Bell -

Smoke detection
First floor MCP & Bell HVAC
LV Switchboards through aspiration
SP1 & SP2 Smoke detection
Raised floor - -
through aspiration

Page 19 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Smoke detection
First floor MCP & Bell HVAC
through aspiration
I&C Control Room
Smoke detection
Raised floor - -
through aspiration
First floor Analog smoke MCP & Bell HVAC
Local Control Station Smoke detection
Raised floor - -
through aspiration

Main Process Building SP1 & SP2


Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Optical beam
SP1 & SP2 MCP & Bell Extraction
smoke

DAF Building
Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
DAF Building - MCP & Bell Extraction

Intermediate Pumping Stations 1 & 2


Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Intermediate Algorithmic optical
MCP & Bell Extraction
Pumping Stations smoke

Administration Building
Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Algorithmic optical
Reception MCP & Bell HVAC
smoke
Algorithmic optical
Corridor MCP & Bell HVAC
smoke
Laboratory Algorithmic optical MCP & Bell HVAC

Page 20 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

smoke
Algorithmic optical
Break Room MCP & Bell HVAC
smoke

Warehouse and Chemical Storage Building


Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Algorithmic optical
Waste Storage Area MCP & Bell Extraction
smoke
Algorithmic optical
Office MCP & Bell HVAC
smoke
Algorithmic optical
Chemical Storage MCP & Bell Extraction
smoke
Algorithmic optical
Workshop MCP & Bell HVAC
smoke
Algorithmic optical
Spare Parts Storage MCP & Bell Extraction
smoke

Chlorine Building
Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Algorithmic optical
Indoor Area MCP & Bell Extraction
smoke
Outdoor Area Flame MCP & Bell -

Chemical Dosing Building


Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Outdoor Area Flame MCP & Bell -
Electrical Room Analog smoke MCP & Bell HVAC

Waste Water Treatment Building

Page 21 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
Algorithmic optical
Pumps Room MCP & Bell Extraction
smoke

CO2 Generation Building


Executive Action
Fire Risk Area Fire Detection Fire Alarm
& Interface
CO2 Generation Algorithmic optical
MCP & Bell Extraction
Building smoke

5. FIREFIGHTING AND DETECTION SYSTEMS AT EACH BUILDING


It will be provided the required fire protection and detection system necessary according to each
building necessities:

5.1. ELECTRICAL BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

As mentioned in the previous chapters, the following systems will be provided at Electrical Building:

 Fire extinguishers
The role of portable extinguishers is to response quickly to a fire incident. They will be located
along normal paths of travel, including exits from areas.

 Automatic fire extinguishing system


Finally, to increase the safety and protection of the building, automatic fire extinguishing
systems have been designed. The selected automatic agent will be FM 200 for the electrical and
control rooms.

Water Spray Fixed System will be provided for Transformers Rooms.

 Fire alarm and detection system.

Page 22 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

In this case, several detection systems shall be used: optical smoke detectors, flame detectors
for UPS Battery Room and smoke aspiration systems for Electrical Rooms. There are different
main areas to control:

o Electrical Rooms:
These rooms will be provided of smoke detectors associated to a smoke aspiration system,
both in ambient room and in raised floor. This system consists of a central detection unit
which draws air through a network of pipes to detect smoke.

o UPS battery room. Flame detectors will be provided for this room.
o Local Control Station and DC System Room will be provided of analog smoke
detectors. Smoke detectors associated to a smoke aspiration system will be located in
local control station raised floor.
o Thermal detectors shall be located in transformer rooms.

An independent audible alarm with electronic sounders shall be installed in the Electrical Building.

The notification appliances (horns/strobes) for the fire detection and alarm shall be independent from
the FM200 systems.

The characteristics of the Fire alarm control panel and the annunciation panel shall meet the NFPA
standards. Also the execution will comply with this standard.

Mean of egress

Occupancy is only expected at Local Control Station. All the other rooms at Electrical Building are not
expected to have a continuous occupation, and the ceiling height requirement of 2285 mm will be
achieved.

Analysing the Means of Egress:

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Stairs (office area):
The minimum width clear of all obstructions shall be 915mm.

Page 23 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Maximum height of risers: 180mm


Minimum height of risers: 100mm
Minimum tread depth: 280mm
Maximum height between landings: 3660 mm
It is a stair serving as an exit then it shall be enclosed with 1 hour resistance rating.
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Occupancy:
Office area maximum occupancy: 22 people
Industrial area maximum occupancy: 487 people according to 9.3m2/person in industrial use in
NFPA101.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story
or section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single
means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 122m with sprinklers and 91 m
without sprinklers.
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

Page 24 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

5.2. MAIN PROCESS BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

 Automatic Sprinkler systems


According to NFPA 101 this building is classified as Special-Purpose Industrial Occupancy low
hazard industrial operations (section 40.1.2.1.2). Therefore , automatic sprinkler system is not required
in the Main Process Building.

 Standpipe systems
Due to the Main Process Building area is over 1115 m2 and the height is below 13 m, it is required to
define a Standpipe system in the Main Process Building according to NFPA 14.

A Class II Standpipe system will be defined. A Class II standpipe system shall provide 1 ½” hose
stations to supply water for use primarily by building occupants or by the Civil Defense during initial
response. These are typically found in cabinets with 30.5 m of hose.

The location of the cabinets will be accessible and will be located so that all portions of the building
are within 9.1 m of a nozzle attached to 30.5 m of hose.

All hose connections and hose stations shall be unobstructed and shall be located not less than 0.9 m or
more than 1.5 m above the floor. The hose connection shall not be obstructed by the closed or open
door or other objects on the landing.

NFPA 14, Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems, provides the design, layout, and water flow
requirements for the systems. The maximum pressure at any point in the system shall not exceed 350
psi. The design pressure is based on a residual pressure of 100 psi.

 Portable Fire Extinguishers


To actuate against the fire, ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located. Also as additional protection, wheeled dry chemical fire
extinguishers will be installed in the RO building. Capacity will be 50 kg.

 Fire alarm and detection system


Fire detection and alarm systems of the addressable type 1 will be provided for this building.
The fire alarm system shall be provided with at least two independent and reliable power
supplies, one primary and one standby.

The installation will be made in accordance with NFPA 72.

Page 25 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

For the protection of the building and considering the fire risk in this area, optical beam smoke
detectors shall be located. They shall be located over the crane to have always an open area without
interferences.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the main process building.

Mean of egress

The Main Process Buildings are areas without internal occupancies but even so the mean of egress
requirement shall be achieved.

The means of egress shall have a ceiling height of not less than 2285 mm.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Stairs (office area):
The minimum width clear of all obstructions shall be 915mm.
Maximum height of risers: 180mm
Minimum height of risers: 100mm
Minimum tread depth: 280mm
Maximum height between landings: 3660 mm
It is a stair serving as an exit then it shall be enclosed with 1 hour resistance rating.
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story
or section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single
means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m.

Page 26 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

- Illumination of Means of Egress.


The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.3. DAF BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

Finally, in the DAF Building, the required systems are:

 Fire extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided for DAF Building. The number and type of fire
extinguishers suitable for the hazards to meet is defined in the NFPA 10.

To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located in the pump area.

Travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than 15.25 meters. Portable fire
extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 18 kg shall be installed that its top is not
more than 1.5 m above the floor. Hand–held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight
exceeding 18 kg shall be installed so that its top is not more than 1.1 m above the floor.

 Fire alarm and detection system


Independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed inside and outside of the
building connected to flashlight ambers.

Manual Call push buttons shall be located in the building.

Page 27 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Mean of egress

The DAF Building is an area without internal occupancies then the ceiling height requirement is
achieved.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Stairs (office area):
The minimum width clear of all obstructions shall be 915mm.
Maximum height of risers: 180mm
Minimum height of risers: 100mm
Minimum tread depth: 280mm
Maximum height between landings: 3660
It is a stair serving as an exit then it shall be enclosed with 1 hour resistance rating.
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story
or section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single
means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m.
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

Page 28 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

5.4. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 1

Firefighting and detection systems

 Fire extinguishers
To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located. According to the actual dimensions of the room, portable
extinguishers will be located, so that travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than
15.25 meters.

 Fire alarm and detection system


For the protection of the building and considering the low fire risk in this area, the fire
detection system will be designed with algorithm optical smoke detectors.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the building, close to the
exit doors. Thus, in this case has been designed:

Mean of egress

The Intermediate pumping station areas are rooms without internal occupancies then the ceiling height
requirement is achieved.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story
or section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single
means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

Page 29 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m.
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.5. INTERMEDIATE PUMPING STATION 2

Firefighting and detection systems

 Fire extinguishers
To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located. According to the actual dimensions of the room, portable
extinguishers will be located, so that travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than
15.25 meters.

 Fire alarm and detection system


For the protection of the building and considering the low fire risk in this area, the fire
detection system will be designed with algorithm optical smoke detectors.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the building, close to the
exit doors. Thus, in this case has been designed:

Mean of egress

The Intermediate pumping station areas are rooms without internal occupancies then the ceiling height
requirement is achieved.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Number of Means of Egress:

Page 30 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story
or section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single
means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m.
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.6. ADMINISTRATION BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

The number and type of fire extinguishers suitable for the hazards to meet is defined in the NFPA 10,
as previously described.
Additionally, a fire detection and alarm system will be provided for this building.
In general, the selected detectors are Algorithmic Optical Smoke Detectors. These shall be located in
the office area and laboratory, covering all the areas.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the Administration Building.

Mean of egress

According to NFPA 101 Section 7.1.5 the mean of egress shall have a ceiling height no less
than 2285 mm. Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story or
section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single

Page 31 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m.
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.7. WAREHOUSE BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

 Fire extinguishers
Portable Fire Extinguisher shall be installed in all Storage Occupancies. The number and type
of fire extinguishers suitable for the hazards to meet is also defined in the NFPA 10.
To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located. Considering that the main fire hazards will be Class A, the
maximum travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than 22.9 meters. Portable fire
extinguishers shall be installed that its top is not more than 1.5 m above the floor and in
conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use.
Also the fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured from view. Wheeled fire
extinguishers shall be located in the chemical storage area.

 Automatic Wet Sprinkler System


According to the building classification (Storage Occupancy Low Hazard), based on NFPA
5000, automatic sprinkler system is not required in Warehouse and Chemical Storage Building.

 Fire alarm and detection system


Optical addressable smoke detectors will be located in all rooms in the building.

Page 32 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Mean of egress

According to NFPA 101 Section 7.1.5 the mean of egress shall have a ceiling height no less than 2285
mm; this requirement will be achieved.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story or
section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 23 m because the use and
occupancy classification of the Warehouse and Chemical Storage Building is High Hazard
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.8. PUMP ROOM AT LIME STONE CONTACTORS

Firefighting and detection systems

 Fire extinguishers
To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located. According to the actual dimensions of the room, portable
extinguishers will be located, so that travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than
15.25 meters.

 Fire alarm and detection system

Page 33 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

For the protection of the building and considering the low fire risk in this area, the fire
detection system has been designed with algorithm optical smoke detectors.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the building, close to the
exit doors. Thus, in this case has been designed:

Mean of egress

The Pump Room at Lime Stone area is a room without internal occupancies then the ceiling height
requirement is achieved.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story or
section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story. A single
means of egress shall be permitted from any story or section in low and ordinary hazard
industrial occupancies, provided that the exit can be reached within the distance permitted as a
common path of travel.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m. .
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

Page 34 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

5.9. CHLORINE BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

 Fire extinguishers
Portable Fire Extinguisher shall be installed in all Ordinary Hazard Industrial Occupancies. The
number and type of fire extinguishers suitable for the hazards to meet is also defined in the
NFPA 10.

To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located.

Considering that the main fire hazards will be Class A, the maximum travel distance to a fire
extinguisher shall be no more than 22.9 meters.

 Automatic Wet Sprinkler Systems


According to the building classification (Special Purpose Industrial Occupancy ordinary hazard
industrial operations) and Fire Safety Guide of the Fire Prevention Department, General
Directorate of Civil Defence, Ministry of Interior, State of Qatar based on NFPA, automatic
sprinkler system is not required in the Chlorine Building.

 Standpipe and hose system


This system is not required at chlorine building according to Section 55.4 of NFPA 5000.

 Fire alarm and detection system


Optical addressable smoke detectors will be located in the Chlorination, room. Flame detector
shall be located in the Chlorine storage area due to the possibility of the diesel truck exhaust
cause false alarm using optical smoke detectors.

The Chlorine Detection system has its own Control Panel located in the building where several
signals will be monitored. This Control panel shall be connected to the DCS in the Central
Control Building. The Chlorine detection system is developed in the process documentation.

Mean of egress

The Chlorine Building is an area without internal occupancies. According to NFPA 101 Section 7.1.5
the mean of egress shall have a ceiling height no less than 2285 mm.

- Doors:

Page 35 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story or
section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m. .
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.10. CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

As mentioned in the previous chapters, the following systems will be provided at Chemical Dosing
Building:

 Fire extinguishers
Portable Fire Extinguisher shall be installed in all Storage Occupancies. The number and type of
fire extinguishers suitable for the hazards to meet is also defined in the NFPA 10.

To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located.

Considering that the main fire hazards will be Class A, the maximum travel distance to a fire
extinguisher shall be no more than 22.9 meters.

 Standpipe systems
Standpipe systems shall not be provided in the Chemical Dosing building due to the sodium
hydroxide stored in bags is incompatible with water. As alternative extinguishing system Portable
Fire Extinguishers will be located in large number.

Page 36 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

 Automatic Wet Sprinkler Systems


According to the building classification (Storage Occupancy Low Hazard), based on NFPA 5000,
automatic sprinkler system is not required in Chemical Dosing Building.

 Fire alarm and detection system


A fire alarm and detection system shall be provided for this building.

The Fire Alarm and Detection System shall monitor the fire protection systems in accordance with
the NFPA requirements. The Chemical Dosing Building is an open structure, the optical smoke
detectors will be affected by dust or sand which may cause false alarm, therefore flame detectors
shall be located. These detectors will be located at 4 meters high. These detectors will be connected
to the Fire Control Panel.

Mean of egress

The Chemical Dosing Building is an area without internal occupancies and an open area then the
requirement related to mean of egress NFPA 101 Section 7.1.5 like the ceiling height, length of exit
access, number of exits are achieved.

5.11. WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

 Fire extinguishers
To actuate against the fire ABC Powder Portable Extinguisher and Carbon dioxide portable
extinguishers will be located. According to the actual dimensions of the room, portable
extinguishers will be located, so that travel distance to a fire extinguisher shall be no more than
15.25 meters.

 Fire alarm and detection system


For the protection of the building and considering the low fire risk in this area, the fire
detection system has been designed with algorithm optical smoke detectors.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the Waste Water
Treatment building, close to the exit doors.

Page 37 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

Mean of egress

In the Waste Water Treatment Building no internal occupancies are expected, then the ceiling height
requirement is achieved.

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story or
section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m. .
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.12. CO2 GENERATION BUILDING

Firefighting and detection systems

As mentioned in the previous chapters, the following systems will be provided:

 Fire extinguishers
The role of portable extinguishers is to response quickly to a fire incident. They will be located
along normal paths of travel, including exits from areas.

Considering an ordinary (moderate) fire hazard Class C, travel distance to a fire extinguisher
shall be no more than 22.8 meters. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not
exceeding 18 kg shall be installed that its top is not more than 1.5 m above the floor. Hand–
held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 18 kg shall be installed so that
its top is not more than 1.1 m above the floor.

Page 38 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 01-Mar-16

 Fire alarm and detection system


For the protection of the building and considering the low fire risk in this area, the fire
detection system has been designed with algorithm optical smoke detectors.

An independent audible alarm with bells or horns shall be installed in the CO2 building, close
to the exit doors.

Means of egress

No permanent occupancy it is expected at CO2 Building. Analysing the Means of Egress for the pump
area:

- Doors:
The minimum clear width of each door opening shall be not less than 810mm.
All doors shall swing in the direction of egress.
- Number of Means of Egress:

According to NFPA 101 not less than two means of egress shall be provided from every story or
section, and not less than one exit shall be reached without traversing another story.

- Travel distance to exit:


The maximum travel distance to exit in this building shall be 91 m. .
- Corridors:
According to NFPA 101, the minimum width shall be 910 mm
- Illumination of Means of Egress.
The means of egress shall be illuminated.
- Marking of Means of Egress:
Means of Egress shall have exits signs.

5.13. SUMMARIZING TABLE

The next table summarizes all the previous chapters showing the fire fighting and fire detection
systems to be installed at each building:

Page 39 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

Building / Area Construction Area (m2) Passive Fire Fire Fire Alarm/Detection
Area No. Description
Use Type Height (m) Protection Suppression System

Buildings

Main Process
Building SP1

Reverse Pumps and Sandwich Panel A = 5338 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher,
Osmosis electrical engines from top to RLH = 12.97 m adequate alarm system, Provide
Standpipe
01 process botton ELH = 9.80 m mean of System smoke detection.
egress.
Ventilation

Main Process
Building SP2

Reverse Pumps and Sandwich Panel A = 4536 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher,
Osmosis electrical engines from top to RLH = 12.97 m adequate alarm system, Provide
Standpipe
02 process botton ELH = 9.80 m mean of System smoke detection.
egress.
Ventilation

Page 40 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

Electrical
Building

Ground Floor A = 1242.17 m2

MV Room Panel boards CMU block wall A = 1012.90 m2 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Ground Floor adequate system, Smoke
FM200 System
mean of aspiration system.
egress.
HVAC

MV Room Cables and - FM200 System Smoke aspiration


Raised Floor conduits system.
03
UPS Battery UPS batteries Reinforced A = 21.80 m2 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Room Ground concrete wall adequate system, Thermal
FM200 System
Floor mean of detector, H detector..
egress.
HVAC

DC System Electrical Reinforced A = 22.27 m2 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Room Ground Equipment concrete wall adequate system, Analog smoke
FM200 System
Floor mean of detector.
egress.

Page 41 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

HVAC

Transformer Transformers Reinforced A(total of 8 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Room Ground concrete wall rooms)=185.2 m2 adequate system, Thermal
Water spray
floor mean of fixed system detector.
egress.

First Floor A=1236.69 m2;


SSL=+4m;
FFL=+5.20;
RSL=+9.10;
RLH=+12.97;
ELH=+9.80

LV Switchboards External walls A = 444.85 m2 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Switchboards CMU block. adequate system, Smoke
FM200 System
SP1&SP2 First Partions: non- mean of aspiration system.
Floor load bearing egress.
CMU wall HVAC

LV Cables and - FM200 System Smoke aspiration


Switchboards conduits system.
SP1&SP2
Raised Floor

Page 42 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

I&C Control Instrumentation External walls A = 209.71 m2 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Room First panel boards CMU block. adequate system, Smoke
FM200 System
Floor Partions: non- mean of aspiration system.
load bearing egress.
CMU wall HVAC

I&C Control Cables and - FM200 System Smoke aspiration


Room Raised conduits system.
Floor

Local Control Control External walls A =75.13 m2 Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher,
Station First computers CMU block. adequate system, Analog smoke
FM200
Floor Partions: non- mean of detector.
load bearing egress.
CMU wall HVAC

Local Control Cables and - FM200 System Smoke aspiration


Station Raised conduits system.
Floor

Administration
Building

04 Office Area and Office electronic CMU block wall A = 295 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire

Page 43 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

Laboratory equipment + sandwich RLH = 5.74 m adequate Extinguisher alarm system, Provide
Office Furniture pannel ELH = 4.32 m mean of smoke detection.
Laboratory egress.
Ventilation

DAF building

Water storage Water Storage Reinforced wall A = 3635 m2 Ventilation Portable Fire Provide audible and
area up to 5,95 m RLH = 14.03 m visual notification.
05 Sandwich Panel ELH = 11.69 m
up to the metal
roof

Intermediate
Pumping
Station SP1

Pump Room Pumps and Sandwich Panel A = 268 m2RLH Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
electrical engines up to the metal = 14.03 m ELH = adequate alarm system.2. Provide
06
roof 11.69 m mean of smoke detection.
egress

Intermediate
Pumping

Page 44 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

Station SP2

Pump Room Pumps and Sandwich Panel A = 268 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
electrical engines up to the metal RLH = 14.03 m adequate alarm system, Provide
07
roof ELH = 11.69 m mean of smoke detection.
egress

Lime Storage
and preparation
tanks

Pump and lime Pumps and Open area A = 1643 m2 Provide Portable Fire None
Extinguisher
storage area. electrical engines adequate
08
Open area mean of
egress

CO2 Building

Process Compressor and Sandwich Panel A = 245.3 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
Equipment other process up to ELH = 7.10 m adequate alarm system,. Provide
09
equipment the roof steel RLH = 8.55 m mean of smoke detection.
egress

Chemical

Page 45 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

Dosing Building

Chemical Storage of Sunshading A = 760 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
Storage and chemicals roof. RLH = 9.71 m adequate alarm system, Provide
dosing building No wall cladding ELH = 7.72 m mean of flame detection.
Pumps
egress

10
Electrical Room Electrical Reinforced A = 37 m2 H Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher
Equipment concrete wall in = 3.8 m adequate system, Analog smoke
closed room. mean of detector.
egress.
HVAC

Warehouse and
Chemical
Storage

Office Area Office area Concrete Block A = 35.27 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
up to 3.5m. RLH = 2.5 m adequate alarm system, Provide
Sandwich Panel ELH = 7.22 m mean of smoke detection.
11 up to the metal egress.
roof Ventilation

Workshop Workshop area Concrete Block A = 107.69 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire

Page 46 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

up to 2.4m. RLH = 8.88 m adequate Extinguisher alarm system, Provide


Sandwich Panel ELH = 7.22 m mean of smoke detection.
up to the metal egress.
roof Ventilation

Storage area Chemical Concrete Block A = 559 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
Storage, Waste up to 2.4m. RLH = 8.88 m adequate alarm system, Provide
Storage, Spare Sandwich Panel ELH = 7.22 m mean of smoke detection.
Parts Storage up to the metal egress.
roof Ventilation

Chlorine
Building

Chlorine Chlorination Concrete block A = 144 m2 Provide Portable Fire New addressable fire
Extinguisher
dioxide room in process in closed room. RLH = 7.85 m adequate alarm system, Provide
a closed area Sunshading roof. ELH = 6.70 m mean of flame detection at
12
Tanks in an No wall cladding egress outdoor area, Provide
opened area optical smoke detection
at indoor area.

Waste Water
Treatment
Building

Page 47 of 48
RAFA3-AAC-211003 FIRE PROTECTION. GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / B 30-Dec-15

Feed pumps Pumps and Metal wall panel. A (pump room) = Provide Portable Fire Addressable fire alarm
Extinguisher
area, sludge electrical engines Sandwich roof 166 m2 A adequate system, Provide smoke
pumps area and panel (silos area) = 97 mean of detection.
13
sludge silos area m2 egress.
RLH = 8.98 m Ventilation
ELH = 7.03 m

Page 48 of 48
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Document No. RAFA3-AAC- 211011

Document Title DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.


DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

TTCL Job No. F-043

AA Job No. 155301

Total 25 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

3/A 11-Nov-15 Issued for


IZ MA MA MA
Construction
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


0/A 11-Jun-15 For Review
1/ A 19-August-15 For Review
2/A 14-October-15 For Review
3/A 11-Nov-15 Issued for Construction

Page 2 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................4

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ...................................4

3. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY ..................................................................................................................4

4. DESIGN BASES AND PARAMETERS .........................................................................................5

4.1. SANITARY WATER.................................................................................................................5

4.1.1. DESIGN ..............................................................................................................................5

4.1.2. MATERIALS......................................................................................................................7

4.1.3. SUPPORTS.........................................................................................................................9

4.1.4. PARAMETERS ..................................................................................................................9

4.1.5. EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWER................................................................................13

4.1.6. CALCULATION ..............................................................................................................17

4.2. SANITARY WASTE WATER................................................................................................20

4.2.1. DESIGN ............................................................................................................................20

4.2.2. PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................21

4.2.3. VENT SYSTEM ...............................................................................................................24

Page 3 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

1. INTRODUCTION

This document outlines drainage and sanitary water supply requirements for buildings and
urbanization of the RAS ABU FONTAS A3 Desalination Project.

At this way, at present document is defined:

• Sanitary water supply


• Sanitary waste water

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

Following standards and guidelines shall be observed:


- Qatar Construction Standard (QCS)
- State of Qatar Public Works Authority Drainage Affairs
- Regulations of Internal Water Installations and Connection Works (Qatar General Electricity &
Water Corporation “KAHRAMAA”
- International Plumbing Code 2010
- British Standard.

3. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY

For each drainage system and sanitary water has been followed this design philosophy:

 Sanitary water supply.

Design philosophy is to provide water suitable for human needs (mainly toilets) that has adequate
purity, pressure, temperature and volume to satisfy applications for this project.

Page 4 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

At this way, water will be supplied from point located at coordinate east: E=240068250, north:
N=384388360 and elevation: COP EL= -1100, (reference drawing RAFA3-TPP-000001 and RAFA3-
TPR-500401); with buried piping to connect with different buildings:

o Administration Building

o Warehouse and Chemical Storage

o Chemical Dosing Building

o Electrical Building

o Chlorine Building.

In each building, water distribution will be with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe.

 Sanitary waste water

Design philosophy is to collect sanitary waste water of each building with fixtures. At this way,
a sanitary waste water system by gravity will be defined, and connected to point located at
coordinate east: E=240360875, north: N=384416000 and elevation: COP EL= -500, (reference
drawing RAFA3-TPP-000001 and RAFA3-TPR-500104) .

4. DESIGN BASES AND PARAMETERS

4.1. SANITARY WATER

4.1.1. DESIGN

According to standard and guidelines, sanitary water design must comply the following requirements:

- Sanitary water connection point is available on the RAS ABU FONTAS A2 site.

- Pipework shall be designed based on the following:

Page 5 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

1. Flow rates shall be determined using BS 806:2012 based on the number of fittings using
a medium frequency of use. Where there are emergency showers then the actual flow
rate of one shower shall be used.

2. Maximum velocity in the pipework shall be no greater than 3 m/s.

3. All pipework shall be designed with a residual pressure of not less than 1.5 bars.

4. The domestic water supply pressure to each facility shall be a minimum of 3.0 bars.

5. All pipework shall have a minimum cover of 1.1 m

- At the entrance of buildings shall be provided with a further isolating valve and sub-meter with
pulse output with a water meter. Pits shall be provided all valves necessary. .

- The system shall be designed to avoid the need of air relief valves by arranging any high points
to naturally vent via buildings/tap outlets.

4.1.1.1.Domestic Hot Water

The hot water shall be produced by electric instantaneous water heater in each zone, where is required.

The water heater will be provided for inter-type accumulator with an internal coil. These devices will
design to provide hot water with a small reserve of water capable of meeting the needs at peak
demand.

Water heater shall be provided with controls to allow a set – point of 43 ºC for sanitary units and
thermostat shall be kept at the factory setting, normally 49ºC for normal applications.

Page 6 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

For minimizing the risk of Legionnaires disease caused by inhaling the bacteria Legionella
pneumophilia which colonize in hot water, the water shall be maintained at 46ºC or higher inside of
the heater.

According QCS, the temperature of the stored water shall never exceed 65°C, and every hot water
storage tank shall be fitted with a thermostat acting on the heat input. Addition, every hot water storage
tank of capacity greater than 150 liters shall be fitted with an automatic control capable of stopping
and starting the heat input to the stored water at pre-set times.

Water mixing valve shall be installed to distribute water at the proper temperature of use.

Service water heating systems shall comply with ASPE 2004 Standard, International Plumbing Code
and per ASHRAE 2007 Applications. Addition, all electrical controls, including thermostats, cut-outs
and switches, shall comply with the relevant provisions of BS 3599.

4.1.2. MATERIALS

Sanitary water piping will be:

• Above ground pipe: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe.

Requirements for Straight Pipe:

a. PVC pipe and jointing material shall comply with British Standard and have a Vicat softening
point and K-value of not less than plus 82ºC.
b. PVC pressure pipe (sanitary water, fire water, process water and sanitary or industrial
wastewater force mains) shall comply with Class E of British Standard 3505/3506 (15
kp/cm2).

Page 7 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

c. PVC gravity pipe (sanitary sewer and industrial wastewater sewer) shall comply with class B
of British Standard 3505/3506 (6 kg/ cm2).
d. PVC pipe sizes up to 63 mm nominal diameter shall be jointed with PVC pipe cement. Pipes
larger than 63 mm diameter shall be flexibly jointed with rubber ring joints.

Requirements for Fittings: For PVC fittings refer to BS EN ISO 1452.

Otherwise, Design criteria must comply:

- Minimum service pressure shall be 242 kPa (35 psi).


- Flow velocities shall be in the range of 1.2 to 2.1 m/s, but in no case shall be exceed 3m/s.
- If the service pressure exceeds the maximum of 552 kPa, an individual pressure regulator will
be required on the service line.
- Alignment
1. Pipework shall be installed so as to give the following minimum clearances between
adjacent services as follows:

• Walls: 25 mm
• Ceilings: 50 mm
• Finished floors either above top of skirting 50 or (if greater): 150 mm
• Adjacent pipes, both insulated: 25 mm
• Adjacent pipes in trench, both insulated 100 mm
• Adjacent pipe, both uninsulated: 150 mm
• Adjacent pipes, one insulated: 75 mm
• Insulated pipes to adjacent conduit or trunking. 100 mm
• Adjacent electrical cables not in conduit or trunking: 150 mm

2. The system shall be 'looped' from the street main, as required to provide adequate flow.
3. Gate or butterfly valves shall be installed to isolate each branch run from main supply run.
Valves 400 mm (16 in.) and larger shall be butterfly valves and 350 mm (12 in.) and
smaller shall be gate valves.

Page 8 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

4.1.3. SUPPORTS

Piping supports is being designed according to QCS, water distribution, section 19.

4.1.4. PARAMETERS

Moreover, pipe size is defined according to International Plumbing Code, chapter 6 where it’s defined
minimum pipe size (mm), and flow rate (L/m) respectively.

Page 9 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

TABLE 604.5
MINIMUM SIZES OF FIXTURE WATER SUPLLY PIPES

MINIMUM PIPE SIZE


FIXTURE
(mm)
a
Bathtubs (1.5 m x 0.8 m) and smaller 15
a
Bathtubs (larger than 1.5 m x 0.8 m) 15
Bidet 15
Combination sink and tray 15
Dishwasher, domestic a 15
Drinking fountain 15
Hose Bibbs 15
a
Kitchen sink 15
a
Laundry 1, 2 or 3 compartments 15
Lavatory (was-basin) 15
Shower, single head a 15
Sinks, flushing rim 20
Sinks, flushing rim 15
Sinks, service 15
Urinal, flush tank 20
Urinal, flushometer valve 15
Wall hydrant 15
Water closet, flush tank 25
Water closet, flushometer valve 15
Water closet, flushometer tank 15
Water closet, one piece a 15

(a)
Where the developed length of the distribution line is 20 m or less, and the available pressure at the
meter is 240 kPa or greater, the minimum size of an individual distribution line supplied from
manifold and installed as part of a parallel water distribution system shall be one nominal tube size
smaller than the size indicated.

Page 10 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Hot water and cold water manifolds shall be sized accordance:

TABLE 604.10.1
MANIFOLD SIZING

NOMINAL SIZE MAXIMUM DEMAND (L/m)


INTERNAL DIAMETER
Velocity at 1.22 m/s Velocity at 2.44 m/s
(mm)
15 7.6 18.9
20 22.7 41.6
25 37.8 75.6
32 56.7 117.2
40 83.2 166.3

The total L/m is the demand of all outlets supplied.

Page 11 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

TABLE 604.3
WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA REQUIRED
CAPACITY AT FIXTURE SUPPLY PIPE OUTLETS

Page 12 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

TABLE 604.4

MAXIMUM FLOW RATES AND CONSUMPTION FOR

PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FIXTURE FITTINGS

PLUMBING FIXTURE MAXIMUM FLOW RATE

OR FIXTURE FITTING OR QUANTITY b

Lavatory, private 0.95 L/m at 414 kPa

Lavatory, public (metering) 0.95 L/m per metering cycle

Lavatory, public (other than


1.9 L/m at 414 kPa
metering)

Shower head a 9.5 L/m at 552 kPa

Sink fauced 8.3 L/m at 414 kPa

Urinal 3.8 per flushing cycle

Water closet 6 per flushing cycle

a. A hand-help shower spray is a shower hand


b. Consumption tolerances shall be determined from referenced standards.

4.1.5. EMERGENCY SAFETY SHOWER

Emergency safety showers will be provided in each area with a risk of accidental exposure to
chemicals and dangerous goods such as manufacturing plants, laboratories and chemical storage.

Enware’s emergency safety showers assist in the rapid removal of contaminants from the body with a
deluge of water and eyewash units flush hazardous contaminants and irritants from eyes.

Thus, safety shower design has been considered in the Project.

Page 13 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Emergency Safety Showers should be Pedestal operated emergency safety showers with face and eye
wash feature.

After analyzing the desalination process and risks, it has been considered that Emergency Safety
Showers are necessary in the following areas:

BUILDING Number
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING 3
WAREHOUSE AND CHEMICAL STORAGE 1
CHLORINE BUILDING 2
ADMINISTRATION BUILDING 1
CO2 BUILDING 1
WASTE WATER TREATMENT BUILDING 1

4.1.4.1. Model and typology

As it’s recommended emergency safety shower should be pedestal operated. So, it has been selected a
model that complies with requirements: Emergency Combination Shower with Hand/Foot Operated
Eyewash

Below it’s shown a sketch with dimensions.

Page 14 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

4.1.4.2. Facilities

For defining eyes shower installation must be considered:

• Inlet connection

There must be a 25 mm (1”) inlet connection, with a minimum working pressure of 210 kPa,
and with the following flow:

Shower: minimum flow requirements: 76 lpm

Eyewash 17 lpm

At least a fifteen minute supply of flushing fluid must be available.

Page 15 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

• Insulation

Sanitary water supply piping must have insulation to moderate water temperature build up, in
the case that was necessary.

It will be followed recommendations: “the temperature of the flushing fluid for emergency
drenching and flushing shall be more than 16ºC and less than 38ºC”.

• Lighting

A permanent light has been designed to provide lighting to each eyeshower. It will be
connected to emergency power.

• Drainage

Drainage is connected to the general drainage system in the building. Thus it has been designed
piping connection between shower and drainage pits. It has provided according to technical
specifications for building service, section 3.3.15.

• Signage

A signage must be installed very close to the eyes shower to indicate location. It must be highly
visible signage.

Page 16 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

4.1.6. CALCULATION

For sizing sanitary water supply pipes shall be considered unit consumption of each terminal
equipment sanitary water, and it shall be calculated according to the criteria outlined.

Each building of the RAS ABU A3 Desalination Project will have a calculation sheets corresponding.

Key design parameters that have been used in this calculation are:

- Maximum velocity in the pipework shall be no greater than 3 m/s.

- All pipework shall be designed with a residual pressure of not less than 1.5 bar.

- All pipework shall have a minimum cover of 1.2m.

- Simultaneous appliances: K = 1 / (N-1) 1/2 (N: number of devices).

- Minimum simultaneity coefficient: 0.2

- Water distribution piping shall be in polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic pipe.

- Piping hot and cold water were isolated with cellular glass.

MINIMUM PIPE
INSULATION
FLUID (thickness in mm)

DN < 40 DN > 40

HOT
25 50
WATER

COLD
25 25
WATER

As it has been mentioned, hot water will be produced with electrical water heaters that area located in
different rooms.

Page 17 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

For the calculation of the hot water demand, it will be considered:

Minimum Instantaneous Minimum Instantaneous


Fixture Type
Flow (CW) (L/m) Flow (HW) (L/m)

Lavatory 7.56 3.8

Shower 11.34 6

Sink 11.34 6

These values must be corrected by a simultaneity factor, so we apply the general formula:

QC = A (QT)B + C

Where:

QC: simultaneous flow calculation (l / s)

QT: Sum of all flows (l / s)

A, B and C: coefficients that depend on the type of building, building total flows and peak
flows apparatus.

In the case of an office building or similar:

A = 0.682

B = 0.450

C = -0.140

Moreover, the output power should be able to provide the current needs in the most unfavorable point.

Page 18 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

The instant power production is:

P (W) = QC (l/s) * 3600 (s/h) * [THW – TNT] (ºC) * 1.16 (Wh / lºC)

Where: THW temperature hot water distribution  43 º C

TNT temperature distribution grid  18 º C

The production of sanitary hot water is determined by the relationship between the power and capacity
of accumulation.

As it has been mentioned, the water heater provided for the production of hot water are the type of
semi - accumulation, with a reserve capacity of accumulation of 15 minutes to covering tip time. The
useful energy provided by the system must be able to meet that demand.

The energy accumulated in water heater that can be used during peak consumption, is defined:

E (W) = Vacumulation (l) * [Tacumulation– TNT] (ºC) * 1.16 (Wh / lºC) * F use of accumulation

Where: Vacumulation: total volume of the deposit

Tacumulation accumulation of water temperature 60ºC

TNT temperature distribution grid  18 º C

F use of accumulation: use factor of the deposit volume that depends on its geometry;

F use of accumulation = 0.63 + 0.14 * (H/D)

H: Hight

D: Diameter

Page 19 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

4.2. SANITARY WASTE WATER

4.2.1. DESIGN

According to Sanitary waste water shall be collected at source and via a site wide gravity drainage
system will be connected directed to RAF A2 sanitary waste water system.

Underground sanitary waste water drainage shall be designed with the following criteria:

− Flow rates to BS EN 12056:2 using system III and “k” factor = 0.7

− Maximum depth of flow for drains up to 250 mm shall be 50%.

− Minimum flow velocity of 0.7 m/s at peak flow condition when pipe is running half-full.

− Maximum velocity of 2.40 m/s when running half-full.

− Pipework cover shall be minimum of 1.2 m (if it’s not possible, the pipes shall be encased in
concrete)

− Material PVC Class B.

− Bedding type shall be calculated based on pipe depth and loading.

− Manhole construction for sanitary, industrial waste water and storm sewer system shall be brick,
concrete, precast concrete sections or GRP

− Manholes shall be spaced at a maximum of 90 m.

− Manholes inspection chamber and sewers should be sited wherever possible a minimum of 1.5 m
from any structural building line.

− At inspection chambers, all pipes should be laid such that their soffits (tops) are at the same
level.

− Pumping stations shall be avoided.

Page 20 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Moreover, sanitary system must comply:

- Horizontal sanitary drainage piping 75 mm and smaller pipes shall be sloped in the direction of
flow by 2%, between 100 -160 mm shall be sloped by 1%; and 160 mm and larger pipes shall
be sloped by 0.5% unless otherwise noted.

- Waste lines shall not be less than 32 mm nominal diameter.

- Make changes in direction of drainage lines with 45° wyes, long turn wyes or sweep bends.
Use long turns fittings wherever space conditions permit.

- No 90° bend shall be more than 15.2 m from the cleanout provided for it.

- All horizontal drains shall be provided with cleanouts located no more than 30 m apart.

- Drain piping for condensate waste from air conditioning cooling coils shall be indirectly
connected to a floor drain, or shall be indirectly connected into the inlet side of a P-trap. If
these condensate drains are located in outdoor area or an open building (without facades), it´s
not required a floor drain connection.

- Traps shall be installed in waste system for each floor drain, hub drain, and basin drain and
connected to drains (unless trap is an integrated part of the plumbing product).

4.2.2. PARAMETERS

Sizes of Sanitary waste water piping will be calculated according to drainage fixture units. For this
calculation will be used values fixed in the International Plumbing Code, chapter 7.

Page 21 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Table 709.1
DRAINAGE FIXTURE UNITS FOR FIXTURES AND GROUPS

a. For traps larger than 75 mm, use table 709.2 of IPC


b. A showerhead over a bathtub or whirlpool bathtub attachment does not increase the drainage
fixture unit value
c. See sections 709.2 through 709.4 (IPC) for methods of computing unit value of fixture not
listed in this table
d. Trap size shall be consistent with the fixture outlet size.

In this table, also is defined minimum size of trap required in each fixture.

Page 22 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Drainage fixture unit values shall be computed on the basis that 3.8 L/m of flow is equivalent two
fixture units

Moreover, the maximum number of drainage fixture units connected to a given size of building sewer,
is calculated according to table 710.1 (1)

TABLE 710.1 (1)


BUILDING DRAINS AND SEWERS

Finally, requirements of traps is defined in table 909.1

Page 23 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

TABLE 909.1
MAXIMUM DISTANCE OF FIXTURE TRAP FROM VENT

4.2.3. VENT SYSTEM

Sanitary drainage venting system shall be designed with the following criteria:

- The plumbing vent system shall not be utilized for purposes other than the venting of the plumbing
system.
- The minimum required diameter of stack vents and vent stacks shall be determined from the
developed length and the total of drainage fixture units connected there to in accordance with table
906.1 , but in no case shall the diameter be less than one half the diameter of the drain served or less
than 32 mm.
- The vent connection to the combination drain and vent pipe shall extend vertically a minimum of
0.15 m above the flood level rim of the highest fixture being vented before offsetting horizontally
- All open pipes that extend through a roof shall be terminated at least 0.3 m above the roof, except
that where a roof is to be used for any purpose other than weather protection, the vent extensions
shall be run at least 2 m above the roof.
- Vent terminals extending through the wall shall terminate a minimum of 0.3 m from the lot line and
3 m above average ground level. Vent terminals shall not terminate under the overhang of a
structure with soffit vents.
- Side wall vent terminals shall be protected to prevent birds or rodents from entering or blocking the
vent opening.

Page 24 of 25
DRAINAGE AND SANITARY WATER SUPPLY.
RAFA3-AAC-211011 Rev. 3 / A 11-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

TABLE 906.1
SIZE AND DEVELOPED LENGTH OF STACK VENTS AND VENT STACKS

a. The developed length shall be measured from the vent to the open air.

Page 25 of 25
ROAD
RAFA3-AAC-211060 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Document No. RAFA3-AAC-211060

Document Title ROADS


DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

TTCL Job No. F-043

AA Job No. 155301

Total 13 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

1/A 23-Nov-15 Issued For Construction MI MA RM MS


REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 13
ROAD
RAFA3-AAC-211060 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


1/A 23-Nov-15 Issued For Construction
0/A 25-Sep-15 For Review

Page 2 of 13
ROAD
RAFA3-AAC-211060 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................4

2. DESIGN CRITERIA.........................................................................................................................4

2.1. GEOMETRIC DESIGN .............................................................................................................5

2.2. ROAD PAVEMENT ..................................................................................................................8

2.3. CROSS SECTION. ....................................................................................................................8

2.4. LIST MAIN ALIGNMENT POINTS ......................................................................................10

Page 3 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This document includes the description of the INTERNAL ROADS, in the RAS ABU FONTAS A3
Desalination Project.

The Plan is as shown below:

2. DESIGN CRITERIA.

The internal roads have been specified according to the “Minimal Functional Specification (MFS) for
A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS DESALINATION PROJECT”

As a minimum, the internal roads shall be designed in line with the following:

• The road surface shall be asphalt.


• Main roads shall be 7.5 m wide and minor roads shall be 6.0 m wide.

Page 4 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

2.1. GEOMETRIC DESIGN

The roads represent a total length of 1.275 m, distributed over the platform where facilities are located.

Horizontal curves are designed to fit as much as possible within the limits of the approved framework
plan. The relevant design requirements for horizontal curves are summarized in the next table:

Name Road Minimun Radius (m) Superelevation (%)

Road 1 12.5 2

Road 2 - 2

Road 3 - 2

Road 4 - 2

Road 5 - 2

Road 6 - 2

Road 7 - 2

Road 8 - 2

Road 9 12.5 2

The main horizontal alignments are designed with straight lines and / or curves with minimum radius
of 12.5 m which accompanying on the geometry of the platform and they are adapting to the level of
the existing buildings.

Transition curves will not be used between tangents and horizontal curves.

The relevant design requirements for principal vertical alignment are summarized in the next table

Page 5 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

Name Road Minimun Crest Minimun Sag Minimum Maximun


K (m) K (m) Gradient (%) Gradient (%)

Road 1 4554- 5315- 0 0,59

Road 2 5217 500 0,25 2

Road 3 1250 - 0 2

Road 4 - 500 0 2

Road 5 250 - 0,66 2

Road 6 - 250 1,82 2

Road 7 1050 2909 0 2

Road 8 800 1,35 2

Road 9 5849 3163 0,2 2

The vertical alignments are designed with an uniform slope that changes between 0,2% and 0,7%
according to the topography of existing site and the existing buildings. (A minimum slope of 0% is
used in connections with TTCL Scope Areas, according to drawings RAFA3-TCV-120002 and
120003).

The main geometric features are summarized:

• Road width ( main roads): 7.5 m


• Road width (minor roads): 7 or 6 m.
• Minimum curve radius ( main roads ): 12.5 m
• Minimum grade: 0,2 %
• Maximum grade:2%

Page 6 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

• Maximum cross slope ( curves ): 2%


• Superelevation (straight): 2%.
• Minimum sag vertical curve ( Kv ): 250 m.
• Minimum crest vertical curve ( Kv ): 250m
• Sidewalk width: 2 m

Page 7 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

2.2. ROAD PAVEMENT

The roads pavement has been designed according to the following minimum requirements: 40mm
Asphaltic wearing course surfacing on 110mm Base Course on 150mm Sub Base Course on 280mm
thick compacted sub grade.

The subgrade earthworks shall be compacted to 98% máximum dry density for the top 600 mm. All
other associated earthworks shall be compacted to at least 95% maximum dry density.

2.3. CROSS SECTION.

In accordance with the “Minimal Functional Specification (MFS) for A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS
DESALINATION PROJECT”:

• Main road width: 7.5 m (one lane 3.75 m)


• Minor road width: 7 or 6 m (one lane 3.5 or 3 m).

The carriageway of the road is provided with pumping of 2 % or with superelevation of 2 % depending
on the road, as stated in the project plans. These cross slopes will permit adequate free surface
drainage of rainwater to the edges of carriageways.

Page 8 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

PARKING

It has been design an specific area to provide the parking needed.

The area is 21,25 meters long, and 18,70 meters wide, and its divided by a central aisle 11,25 meters
wide.

The dimensions of the parking slots and aisle requirements are provide in the figure below:

Page 9 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

2.4. LIST MAIN ALIGNMENT POINTS

ROAD 1
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240360,875 384523,953 0,060 -2,0 % 2,00 %
10 240350,875 384523,953 0,060 -2,0 % -1,60 %
11,128 240349,747 384523,953 0,060 -2,0 % -2,00 %
30,763 240337,247 384511,453 0,073 -2,0 % -2,00 %
50 240337,247 384492,216 0,110 -2,0 % -2,00 %
66,488 240337,247 384475,727 0,151 -2,0 % -2,00 %
106,488 240337,247 384435,727 0,143 -2,0 % -2,00 %
127,453 240337,247 384414,762 0,083 -2,0 % -2,00 %
130,08 240337,247 384412,135 0,076 -2,0 % -2,00 %
139,941 240334,121 384402,97 0,061 -2,0 % -2,00 %
149,383 240328,351 384395,495 0,064 -2,0 % -2,00 %
157,453 240321,977 384390,705 0,080 -2,0 % -2,00 %
163,082 240316,48 384389,661 0,096 -2,0 % -2,00 %
210 240269,562 384389,652 0,225 -2,0 % 2,00 %
250 240229,562 384389,644 0,224 -2,0 % 2,00 %
301,5 240178,062 384389,634 0,078 -2,0 % 2,00 %
331,5 240148,062 384389,629 0,091 -2,0 % 2,00 %
355 240124,562 384389,624 0,177 -2,0 % 2,00 %
392,436 240087,126 384389,617 0,194 2,0 % 2,00 %
395 240084,575 384389,835 0,187 2,0 % 2,00 %
416,001 240072,123 384404,617 0,120 2,0 % 2,00 %
420 240072,123 384408,616 0,108 0,9 % 2,00 %
450 240072,123 384438,616 0,102 -2,0 % 2,00 %
465 240072,123 384453,616 0,144 -2,0 % 2,00 %
505 240072,123 384493,616 0,080 -1,0 % 1,00 %
512,245 240072,123 384500,860 0,037 0,0 % 0,00 %

Page 10 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

ROAD 2
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240337,247 384437,754 0,149 -0,3 % -0,3 %
4,197 240333,05 384437,754 0,233 -1,3 % 1,1 %
15,803 240321,445 384437,754 0,330 -2,0 % 2,0 %
85 240252,247 384437,754 0,108 -2,0 % 2,0 %
115 240222,247 384437,754 0,098 -2,0 % 2,0 %
155,042 240182,205 384437,754 0,200 -2,0 % 2,0 %
195,042 240142,205 384437,754 0,168 -2,0 % 2,0 %
249,862 240087,385 384437,754 -0,059 -2,0 % 2,0 %
261,791 240075,457 384437,754 0,034 -0,8 % 0,5 %
265,125 240072,123 384437,754 0,100 -0,3 % -0,3 %

ROAD 3
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240360,875 384412,000 0,060 -2,0 % 2,0 %
10 240350,875 384412,000 0,020 -2,0 % 2,0 %
15,671 240345,204 384412,000 -0,025 -1,4 % 1,2 %
19,871 240341,004 384412,000 0,000 -0,8 % 0,4 %
23,628 240337,247 384412,000 0,075 -0,3 % -0,3 %

ROAD 4
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240360,875 384462,000 0,060 -2,0 % 2,0 %
12,978 240347,897 384462,000 0,060 -1,8 % 1,8 %
22,978 240337,897 384462,000 0,160 0,0 % 0,3 %
23,628 240337,247 384462,000 0,173 0,2 % 0,2 %

Page 11 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

ROAD 5
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240337,247 384472,337 0,159 0,2 % 0,2 %
3,925 240333,322 384472,337 0,238 -1,0 % 1,2 %
10,58 240326,667 384472,337 0,282 -2,0 % 2,0 %

ROAD 6
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240093,932 384472,236 0,2 -2,0 % 2,0 %
7,742 240086,19 384472,236 0,059 -2,0 % 2,0 %
17,292 240076,64 384472,236 0,068 -1,1 % 1,1 %

ROAD 7
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240337,247 384500,860 0,090 -0,3 % 0,6 %
3,856 240333,391 384500,860 0,167 -1,5 % 1,6 %
36,144 240301,104 384500,860 0,316 -2,0 % 2,0 %
37,818 240299,429 384500,860 0,298 -2,0 % 2,0 %
77,818 240259,429 384500,860 0,143 -2,0 % 2,0 %
80 240257,247 384500,860 0,150 -2,0 % 2,0 %
120 240217,247 384500,860 0,150 -2,0 % 2,0 %
130 240207,247 384500,860 0,120 -2,0 % 2,0 %
170 240167,247 384500,860 0,120 -2,0 % 2,0 %
180 240157,247 384500,860 0,150 -2,0 % 2,0 %
220 240117,247 384500,860 0,140 -2,0 % 2,0 %
232,834 240104,413 384500,860 0,095 -2,0 % 2,0 %
265,875 240071,373 384500,860 0,037 0,5 % 0,5 %

Page 12 of 13
ARCHITECTURAL DESIGN CRITERIA FOR
RAFA3-ACC-211505 Rev. 1 / A 23-Nov-15
CHEMICAL DOSING BUILDING

ROAD 8
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240198,678 384500,857 0,100 -0,4 % 0,4 %
2,716 240198,678 384503,572 0,046 -1,5 % 1,5 %
7,75 240198,677 384508,607 0,029 -2,0 % 2,0 %
20,322 240198,677 384521,178 0,200 -2,0 % 2,0 %

ROAD 9
LEFT RIGHT
STA X Y ROAD EL.
SUPERELEVATION SUPERELEVATION
0 240145,332 384500,858 0,175 0,0 % 0,0 %
3,063 240145,328 384503,921 0,114 -1,0 % 1,0 %
16,938 240145,307 384517,796 -0,003 -2,0 % -0,5 %
23,348 240145,297 384524,206 0,017 -2,0 % -1,9 %
38,9 240136,790 384536,032 0,065 -2,0 % -2,0 %
42,964 240132,797 384536,687 0,077 -2,0 % -2,0 %
68,9 240106,861 384536,687 0,082 -2,0 % 2,0 %
91,888 240083,873 384536,687 0,036 -2,0 % -1,9 %
111,314 240071,375 384524,397 -0,003 -2,0 % -2,0 %
111,523 240071,373 384524,187 -0,003 -2,0 % -2,0 %
134,85 240071,373 384500,860 0,038 0,0 % 0,0 %

Page 13 of 13
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Document No. RAFA3-AAC-211080

Document Title STORM DRAINAGE


DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

TTCL Job No. F-043


AA Job No. 155301

Total 20 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

2/A 17-Nov-15 Issued For


DG MA RM MS
Construction
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


2/A 17-Nov-2015 Issued For construction
1/A 24-Sep-15 For Review
0/B 14-Jul-15 For Review
0/A 22-May-15 For Review

Page 2 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

CONTENTS

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................................4

2. STANDARDS ...................................................................................................................................4

3. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY ..................................................................................................................4

3.1. Storm water system ....................................................................................................................6

3.2. Precipitation values ....................................................................................................................6

3.3. Main requirements ......................................................................................................................8

3.4. Software......................................................................................................................................9

3.5. Model description and results.....................................................................................................9

Page 3 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This document includes the description of the STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEM, in the RAS
ABU FONTAS A3 Desalination Project.

The location of the building in the Plan is as shown below:

2. STANDARDS
Storm drainage system has been designed according to Qatari & Internationa Standars:

- QCS 2014. Section 6. Part 14. Road Drainage

- QCS 2014. Section 8. Drainage works

- QCS 2014. Section 20, Part 20 Drainage works for building

3. DESIGN PHILOSOPHY
The surface water drainage system will be designed as a gravity system. Uncontaminated
rainwater will be collected from hard standing areas, the roofs of the plant buildings and the
roads in order to be directed into an underground pipe system to the existing tie-in nº TP-
SP1&2/BOP-7-2 (according to drawing RAFA3-TPP-00001). Runoff generated on the roofs

Page 4 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

will be collected to the level of the ground by gutters and downpipes, flowing by the different
areas until reach the siphon gutters installed, as it’s indicated in the architectural documents
(design criteria & drawings).

The identified low points of the road where the siphon gutters will be installed are shown in
the internal road drawings (RAFA3-AAC-651060 to 651065). These gutters will be of the
siphon type in order to trap any possible sand which could be poured into the drainage
system, facilitating its periodic cleaning and avoiding the system blockage.

Therefore rainwater from roads, non-process areas and building roofs will be collected and
drained to the existing tie-in nº TP-SP1&2/BOP-7-2 by means of a gravity underground pipe
system provided with on-site concrete inspection pits in the system heads, changes of
alignment and pipe size, intersections and junctions, ends, and reasonable intervals (never
over 100 m distance between two consecutive pits).

Design it has been conditioned by the tie-in, with a -2.3 elevation.

The underground pipe system will be executed in class III uPVC according to SASO 14 (6
Kg/cm2). Nitrile rubber joint will be provided.

The underground pipe will run under the center of road (when it’s possible) in a trench . Pipe
will be covered with concrete.

Page 5 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Inspection pits and manholes located on areas where there is rolled traffic, class D 400 cast
iron covers for a breaking load of more than 400 kN will be provided according to ISO 1083
and EN-124. On the other hand, those located on just pedestrian accessible areas will have a B
125 breaking load.

3.1. Storm water system

Storm water system has been designed according to requirements and with precipitation
values of Qatar.

3.2. Precipitation values

The following table shows the values of intensity, duration, frequency has been taken into
account for the calculation of the rain of design:

Tab.1. IDF Data for Qatar

It has been taken the 10yr values into account for storm water drainage design. The following
figure shows IDF curve for 10 year values.

Page 6 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Fig. 1. Qatar IDF 10 & STORM

In any given storm, the instantaneous intensity is the slope of the mass rainfall curve at a
particular time. The mass rainfall curve is simply the cumulative precipitation which has
fallen up to a specific time. For hydrologic analysis, it is desirable to divide the storm into
convenient time increments and to determine the average intensity over each of the selected
periods.

Deemed suitable to design a synthetic rain with a duration of 30 minutes. This histogram has
been calculated with the methodology of alternating blocks (every 10 minutes) from IDF
curve data showed at Fig 1. These results are then plotted as rainfall hyetographs, which is
presented in figure below,

Page 7 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Fig. 2. Storm 30 min

As it’s shown, the maximum intensity is produced at 10 minutes, and the maximum run-off
will be produced at 20 minutes.

Hyetographs provide greater precision than a constant rainfall intensity by specifying the
precipitation variability over time, and are used in conjunction with hydrographic (rather than
peak flow) methods.

3.3. Main requirements

Below main requirements of storm water system are defined:

• Water drainage system has been designed as a gravity system.

Page 8 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

• Rainwater from roads, non-process areas and building roofs shall be collected and
drained to the existing outlet tie-in nº TP-SP1&2/BOP-7-2.
• The minimum slope of the collectors will be 0.3%
• Overflows from the collectors are not permitted
• Velocity – 0.4-3.0 m/s
• Pipe materials will be uPVC.

3.4. Software

For the study has been employed the SWMM (Storm Water Management Model) model that
is managed by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). The EPA Storm Water
Management Model (SWMM) is a dynamic rainfall-runoff simulation model used for single
event or long-term (continuous) simulation of runoff quantity and quality from primarily
urban areas. The runoff component of SWMM operates on a collection of subcatchment areas
that receive precipitation and generate runoff and pollutant loads. The routing portion of
SWMM transports this runoff through a system of pipes, channels, storage/treatment devices,
pumps, and regulators. SWMM tracks the quantity and quality of runoff generated within
each subcatchment, and the flow rate, flow depth, and quality of water in each pipe and
channel during a simulation period comprised of multiple time steps.

3.5. Model description and results

The following images shows the network in SWMM (nodes, links and subcatchments):

Page 9 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Figure 3: Node ID’s

Page 10 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Figure 4: Link ID’s

Page 11 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Figure 5: Subcatchment ID’s

Page 12 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

The following simulation options have been used:

Page 13 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Page 14 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

The parameters entered in the subcatchments/basins that allow to calculate run-off volume
with the SWMM software are as follows:

• Area, as every contribution in hectares basin surface.


• Basin wide, defined as the characteristic of the flow width
• Pending. By the geometric characteristics of the studied network, applied to the
watershed slope is 0.5%
• Waterproof area. The percentage of waterproof area for each watershed was
introduced. Impervious surfaces are roads, rooftops and sidewalks.
• Coef. n manning (waterproof): adopted n = 0, 012
• Coef. n manning (permeable): adopted n = 0, 1
• We have considered that there is interception of precipitation by storage in
depressions, 2.0 mm for 75% of the water-proof surface and 5.0 mm in the permeable
surface.
• The internal flow between waterproof and permeable areas of each basin is defined
generally as outlet, so both contribute directly to discharge well. In this case, it is not
necessary to define the percentage of runoff transported between them.
• Infiltration parameters for the permeable area are:
o According to the equal to 76 SCS curve number

• Groundwater contributions have not been considered

RESULTS

After entering the subcatchments and rainfall hyetograph showed at Fig.2 we have obtained
the following inside diameters in collectors:

Page 15 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Figure 6: Inside diameters in collectors

Page 16 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Below are the hydraulic profiles of the main collectors at the time of maximum flow
circulation:

Page 17 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Therefore, it is observed that overflows from the collectors to other areas do not occur.

Reached maximum speeds and reached maximum filling degrees are shown in the following
figures:

Page 18 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Next table shows the hydrologic and hydraulic parameters introduced in the subcatchments
and runoff results obtained in the model:

Page 19 of 20
STORM DRAINAGE
RAFA3-AAC-211080 Rev. 2 / A 17-NOV-15
DESIGN CRITERIA

Page 20 of 20
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

Document No. RAFA3-AAC-211095

Document Title HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT

MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

TTCL Job No. F-043

AA Job No. 155301

Total 9 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

2/ A 15-Jan-16 ISSUED FOR


MP IA RM MS
CONSTRUCTION
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


0/A 01-Oct -15 FOR REVIEW
1/A 03-Dec-15 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
2/A 15-Jan-16 ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION

Page 2 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

CONTENTS
1. AIM ...................................................................................................................................................4

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES ...................................4

3. DESIGN BASIS AND PARAMETERS...........................................................................................5

3.1. DESIGN CONDITIONS AND ASSUMPTIONS .....................................................................5

4. UNDERGROUND HYDRANT .......................................................................................................7

5. OUTDOOR HOSE HYDRANT .......................................................................................................7

6. HYDRANT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT ..............................................................................................7

6.1. FIRE HOSE ................................................................................................................................7

6.2. WATER NOZZLE .....................................................................................................................8

6.3. FIRE HOSE SPANNER WRENCH ..........................................................................................8

6.4. UNDERGROUND HYDRANT WITH KEY ............................................................................8

6.5. OUTDOOR HOSE CABINET ...................................................................................................8

6.6. COVER SHEET FOR OUTDOOR CABINET .........................................................................9

6.7. FIRE HOSE REEL WITH CABINET .......................................................................................9

Page 3 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

1. AIM
This document outlines the fire protection requirements for the Hydrant System at Ras Abu Fontas A3
Desalination Plant.

2. SPECIFICATIONS, GUIDELINES, STANDARDS AND REFERENCES


The bases for Fire Protection Design and calculations are set in the following documents:
- QCDD Qatar Civil Defense Department.
- QCS Qatar Construction Specification 2014
- Material ASTM/ASME/ANSI/API
- Minimal Functional Specification (MSF) for A3 New Water Plant at Ras Abu Fontas
- Rules and regulations for Plumbing Services prepared by the Qatar General Electricity and
Water Corporation.
- Regulations on Internal Water Installations and Connection Services produced by Kahramaa.
- International Fire Code (IFC)
- NFPA Standards, including among others:
o NFPA 14 – Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
o NFPA 24 –Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and theis
Appurtenances.
o NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code.

Page 4 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

o NFPA 5000 – Building Construction and Safety Code.

3. DESIGN BASIS AND PARAMETERS


The plant is located in the Western Part of the Qatar Peninsula- State of Qatar, within the existing Ras
Abu Fontas Power & Water Stations which is located about 10 km from Doha.

Latitude: 25º north

Longitude: 51º east

Altitude: 2 m

The climatic conditions are severe, with ambient temperatures reaching up to 55ºC in summer time,
with high humidity and marine ambient, what will be taken into account when designing any outdoor
equipment or pipes. Additionally, protection against dust and sand for outdoor equipment requires
special attention

The fire water distribution pipework is designed as a closed loop, or series of loops, so each
connection is fed from two directions and each feed is independent of the other.

The hydrant system described herein is part of a global hydrant system of Ras Abu Fontas A3
Desalination Plant.

Fire water connection points to the global network are the following:

1. Fire water connection point TP-BOP/SP1&2-6-1 COP EL=-2500


2. Fire water connection point TP-BOP/SP1&2-6-2 COP EL=-2500
3. Fire water connection point TP-BOP/SP1&2-6-3 COP EL=-1400
4. Fire water connection point TP-BOP/SP1&2-6-4 COP EL=-1400

(Tie-in points connections according to drawing RAFA3-TPP-00001)

3.1. DESIGN CONDITIONS AND ASSUMPTIONS

Fire water system process conditions are:

 Design Temperature: 50 deg C


 Design Pressure: 12 bar
 Test Pressure: 15.5 bar
 Life Time min. 30 years

Page 5 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

By above conditions, HDPE manufacture selected is SDR-9, PE100, PN20 HDPE pipe and fitting.

Fusion type: Butt fusion and Electro fusion.

The fire water main shall be of closed loop deigned and shall be laid along the roads.

The fire water mains shall generally be laid underground. If an above ground fire main is provided it
must be adequately protected, and routed so as not to restrict access for operation and maintenance of
the facility.

No connections for permanent use of water other than for firefighting shall be made in the fire water
system.

Pipe used in the fire water main shall be made o HDPE (underground) or Hot dip galvanized carbon
steel (aboveground).

Butterfly type valve(s) with valve pit shall be provided strategically in the fire water main loops to
ensure adequate and alternate supply to all usage points in case of any fire water main line failure and
can be taken out of service for maintenance or repair without interfering with the fire water supply to
the area.

The Fire main shall be isolated with butterfly valves that no more than 300 m of line containing
hydrants and water spray systems. Only three water hydrants can be installed between block valves.

No connection for permanent use of water other than for fire fighting shall be made in the fire water
system.

See details in RAFA3-AAC-651096 General Layout. Fire Protection. Hydrant System. Details

3.1.1. Fire water demand

The largest fire water demand of one fire risk areas shall be the maximum fire water demand based on
a single major fire breaking out in one fire risk area in any one time.

Refer of NFPA standard for the fire water supply for the permanent fire fighting installation should be
based on providing a 2-hour supply for both items of the largest fixed fire suppression system demand
and the hose stream demand that not less than 500 gpm.(1890 L/min).

For the purpose of estimating minimum fire water demand, followings shall be applied; - Fire water
demand for one fixed water spray system + two water hydrants.

When estimating fire water demand for water hydrant, the following flow rate shall be used:

Page 6 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

- 1(One) Water Hydrant Nozzle: 950 Lpm.

4. UNDERGROUND HYDRANT
Water hydrants shall be provided throughout the plant to extinguish the fire manually. Wet barrel
hydrants shall be located around the plant and shall be no more than 80 m apart along road.

Water hydrants shall be readily accessible from roads and be located in such a way that they cannot be
damaged by road traffic.

Water hydrant shall be wet barrel type 3" underground hydrants. These underground hydrants shall be
3" Flange inlet and 2-1/2" BSRT (M) outlet and completed with key bar for open/close block valve of
hydrant.

5. OUTDOOR HOSE HYDRANT


Hose cabinet shall be located adjacent to underground hydrant and shall be within 5 meters from the
hydrant. Each hose box shall be made of steel self-standing type containing the following devices:

Two - 2.1/2" x 30 m. fire hose.

Two - 2.1/2" jet/spray water nozzle

One - stand pipe

One - hydrant key bar for stand pipe

6. HYDRANT SYSTEM EQUIPMENT


Hydrant system equipment will be:

6.1. FIRE HOSE

Type: Lay-flat delivery hose


Length: 30 m.
Coupling: Male/Female BS336 coupling
Material of Construction:
- Hose Non-percolating lay-flat hose
- Coupling Aluminum alloy or equivalent
Paint/Finish: Red

Page 7 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

Acceptance test pressure: 15 bar (217.56 psi)


Size 2.1/2”

6.2. WATER NOZZLE

Type: 2.1/2" fog/straight combination


Discharge capacity: Min. 450 Lpm at 3.5 bar G
Material of construction: Bronze or Equivalent
Connection: Male BS336
Approval: UL and/or FM

6.3. FIRE HOSE SPANNER WRENCH

Type: Universal Spanner for 2.1/2" thru 4"


Material of construction: Aluminum alloy or Equivalent

6.4. UNDERGROUND HYDRANT WITH KEY

Type: Underground hydrant with key


Piping Connection:
- Inlet 3" Flange inlet
- Outlet 2 1/2" BSRT (M) outlet
Material of construction: Cast iron or as per manufacturer
Accessories: Key bar (1 meter long approximately). Duct foot bend 4”x3”
Approval: BSI kitemark and QCDD approval

6.5. OUTDOOR HOSE CABINET

Type: Self-standing, to be installed for two-way fire hydrants, weatherproof with


louver, hinged door and adequately sized for stored items.
Stored items:
- 2 pcs. of 2.1/2" x 30 m. fire hose.
- 2 pcs. of 2.1/2" water nozzle
- 1 pcs. of 2.1/2" Standpipe
- 1 pc. of fire hose spanner.
Material of construction: Carbon steel sheet 1.6 mm. thickness
Paint/Finish: Epoxy fire red

Page 8 of 9
FIRE PROTECTION. HYDRANT SYSTEM. DESIGN
RAFA3-AAC-211095 Rev. 2 / A 15-Jan-16
CRITERIA

6.6. COVER SHEET FOR OUTDOOR CABINET

Type: Weather proof


Material of construction: As per manufacturer's standard

6.7. FIRE HOSE REEL WITH CABINET

Type: Automatic swing pipe


Hose size: 1"
Material of construction: As per manufacturer
Accessories: Completed with built in lock shield valve, pressure reducing valve,
Nozzle and 1" x 30 m. long hose reel.
Approval: LPCB / BS Kitemark and QCDD approval.
Paint/Finish: Epoxy fire red.

Page 9 of 9
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Document No. RAFA3-AAE-211001

Document Title Electrical Design Criteria

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


TTCL Job No. F-043

MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

AA Job No. 155301

Total 28 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

1/A 30/06/2015 Issued for Review IA JM PL RM


REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


0/A 18–Mar-2015 For Review
0/B 19–Apr-2015 For Review
1/A 30/06/2015 Issued for Review

Page 2 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................5

2. SCOPE ..............................................................................................................................................5

3. GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS.....................................................................................5

3.1. STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS ......................................................................5

3.2. LOCATION & POWER DEMAND..........................................................................................5

3.3. AVAILABILITY & RELIABILITY OF SUPPLY....................................................................6

3.4. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT..................................................................................................6

3.5. ENVIRONMETAL AND SERVICE CONDITIONS ...............................................................6

3.6. VOLTAGE LEVELS .................................................................................................................7

3.7. STEADY STATE AND TRANSIENT VOLTAGE DROPS ....................................................7

3.8. OVERALL SYSTEM POWER FACTOR.................................................................................8

4. 11KV SWITCHGEARS ...................................................................................................................8

5. MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES ..................................................................10

6. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS............................................................................................10

7. LV SWITCHGEARS / MCCs ........................................................................................................12

8. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES..........................................................................13

9. UPS and DC System .......................................................................................................................13

9.1. GENERAL ...............................................................................................................................13

9.2. UPS...........................................................................................................................................14

9.3. BATTERIES ............................................................................................................................15

9.4. BATTERY CHARGERS .........................................................................................................16

10. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR.....................................................................................18

11. MOTOR CONTROL STATIONS ...............................................................................................18

Page 3 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

12. MOTORS .....................................................................................................................................19

12.1. MV MOTORS ......................................................................................................................19

12.2. LV MOTORS .......................................................................................................................20

13. POWER, CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES .......................................................20

13.1. MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES .........................................................................................21

13.2. LOW VOLTAGE CABLES .................................................................................................21

13.3. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL CABLES ..........................................................22

14. CABLE RACEWAYS .................................................................................................................22

15. EARTHING SYSTEM AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION......................................................23

ATTACHMENT I STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS ...................................................26

Page 4 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

1. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this document is to provide the Design Basis for the selection and sizing of the different
equipment & components of the electrical system proposed for the RAS ABU FONTAS A3 Desalination plant.

2. SCOPE
The scope of this document includes providing the design basis for the following equipment:

• 11kV Switchgears
• MV Variable Speed Drives
• Transformers
• Low Voltage Switchgears
• LV Variable Speed Drives
• UPS and DC System
• Emergency Diesel Generator
• Local Control Stations
• Motors
• Power, Control and Instrumentation Cables
• Cable Raceways
• Earthing System and Lightning Protection

3. GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS


3.1. STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS

Equipment and materials provided comply in design, construction and performance with the IEC Standards
together with the requirements of competent Authorities having jurisdiction over all or part of their
manufacture, installation and operation.

See Appendix I for details.

3.2. LOCATION & POWER DEMAND

For this RAS ABU FONTAS A3 Desalination plant there will be one load center divided in two electrical sub-
systems:

Page 5 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

• SP1 (22MIGD)
• SP2 (14MIGD)

The site is located within the Ras Abu Fontas Power & Water Stations and the power demand shall be supplied
from the 132/11.5kV Main Substation.

3.3. AVAILABILITY & RELIABILITY OF SUPPLY

The supply to each electrical sub-system indicated above will be provided from 132/11.5kV Main Substation at
11kV voltage level and will be done independently.

For the purpose of reliability, each independent 11kV supply will be composed of dual feeders (2x100%).

3.4. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT

The Complete electrical switchgear system shall be designed for the supply source short circuit current levels. A
load flow and short circuit analysis will be conducted to ensure the short circuit currents of the system at various
levels. The analysis will be conducted using ETAP Software.

The Short circuit feeding by 11kV supply source will be required from 132/11.5kV Main Substation designer.

3.5. ENVIRONMETAL AND SERVICE CONDITIONS

The electrical system will be designed for the following conditions:

Design Climatic Conditions Unit Data

Ambient Air Temperature ºC 50 (dry bulb)

Page 6 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

ºC 34 (wet bulb)

Ambient Air Pressure mbar 1,013

Seawater Temperature ºC 35

The design ambient temperature of the electrical equipment located indoors shall be 50°C and for the outdoor
equipment 55ºC with a relative humidity of 100%.

3.6. VOLTAGE LEVELS

The following voltage levels will be considered in the project:

• RO Plant Connection voltage: .................... 11kV


• DOL Motors:
o Up to 150kW: ................................ 400V
o >150kW:........................................ 11kV
• VSD Driven Motors:
o Up to 250kW: ................................ 400V
o >250kW:........................................ 6.6kV
• Low Voltage distribution:........................... 400/230V
• Command: .................................................. 110Vac and 230Vac
• Lighting: ..................................................... 400/230V
• Safe DC: ..................................................... 110Vdc, 24Vdc
• Safe AC: ..................................................... 230Vac

3.7. STEADY STATE AND TRANSIENT VOLTAGE DROPS

During normal system operation and under steady state conditions, the voltage at consumer terminals will not
deviate from the rated equipment voltage by more than 5%. The combined voltage and frequency deviations lie
within Zone A as described in IEC 60034-1.

Page 7 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

During starting or reacceleration of motors, the voltage at the motor terminals will not deviate by more than
+10% or -20% from rated equipment voltage. Transient voltage deviations occurring at switchgear bus bars
during motor or group of motors starting/reacceleration will be such as to maintain a voltage on all other
consumers of at least 80%, but not more than 110% of rated equipment voltage.

The complete power system will be analyzed for voltage drops and receiving end voltages. A load flow analysis
will be conducted to ensure minimum safe working sending and receiving end voltages. A motor starting
analysis will be conducted for determining short time voltage drops in cables due to high starting currents to
ensure minimum safe working voltage required to start the motors. The analysis will be conducted using ETAP
Software.

3.8. OVERALL SYSTEM POWER FACTOR

Power factor of individual components of the complete power system will be obtained and overall system power
factor will be determined.

4. 11KV SWITCHGEARS
This section is intended to provide basis for selection of the MV Switchgear.

The proposed switchgear under this package includes the following:

1) 11kV MV Switchgear SP1-MV-SWG (10BBA/10BBB)


2) 11kV MV Switchgear SP2-MV-SWG (20BBA/20BBB)

One vital factor which influence the selection of the MV switchgear is the Fault Level rating (Short Circuit
withstand Current rating) for which the switchgear can withstand. A short-circuit study will be prepared using
ETAP software so that the fault level is determined in each busbar of the system. Switchgear short circuit rating
will be selected above the calculated values, being a minimum value 31.5kA/1s.

Also the following basic design factors shall be considered while selecting the 11kV Switchgear:

Page 8 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

For 11kV
S.n. Description Unit
switchgear

a. Standard IEC 62271

b. Voltage Rating

i) Nominal kV 11

ii) Maximum kV 12

c. Insulation Level

i) Impulse voltage withstand kVp 75

ii) 1 minute power frequency kV 28


withstand voltage

d. Short-Circuit Rating

i) Peak withstand kAp 80

ii) Short time for 1 sec kA 31.5

e. Breaker Type VCB/SF6

Draw out

f. Construction Metal clad

g. Degree of Protection IP41

Each Medium Voltage Switchgear (SP1 and SP2) is fed by 2 x 100% feeders and is split in two halves through a
bus coupler. It is equipped with an automatic transfer system that will automatically couple the two bus-bars in
the case of loss of one of the incomers.

The restoration to normal operation will be done manually and it will not be possible to parallel the incomer
feeders. The transfer system will be provided with electrical interlocks so that only 2 out of the 3 elements can

Page 9 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

be closed at the same time, hence the expected maximum fault current for these switchgears will be limited to
that of one of the two incomers.

The medium voltage switchgears will be located in the Electrical equipment building ground floor, in an air
conditioned environment where temperature and humidity levels will be kept under control.

Medium voltage switchgear is provided with earth switches that are mechanically interlocked with associated
circuit breakers via keys.

5. MEDIUM VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES


Medium Voltage Variable Speed Drives (VSD) will be used wherever the process demands large motors and
variable speed.

Input voltage of VSD will be 11 kV and output voltage 6.6 kV. A drive isolation transformer will be furnished
to provide power conversion from the line voltage to the required VSD voltage and to isolate the line from
harmonics and common mode voltages.

VSD rectifier design will be minimum 18 pulses.

All MV VSDs will be located in the Electrical equipment building ground floor.

6. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS
This section is intended to provide basis for selection of the transformer sizes.

Distribution transformers will be supplying power to a section of LV of a double section board. The transformer
will be designed and sized to supply the required full load of both section with 10% additional capacity above
the full load.

While selecting the transformer size the following shall be considered:

Page 10 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

1) Design Margins:
a) System Losses: 3%
b) Future Expansion Works: 10%

Total Additional allowance: 13% (i.e. DM = 1.13)

2) Overall Load Factor:


a) Overall Load Factor (LF): As applicable

Hence the size of the transformer can be achieved from the following formula:

Where KVAT -is the required rating of the transformer

DM -is the multiplication factor for design margins

LF -is the overall load factor

∑kW -is the sum of active components of individual loads

∑kVAr -is the sum of reactive components of individual loads

After arriving the required rating of the transformer, the sufficiency of the rating shall be checked for the over
load withstanding capacity and voltage drops for worst case of large motor starting condition i.e. assuming that
the last large motor is started when all the other large rating motors, which are assigned to continuously
working, are under running.

Additionally, de-rating factors due to the site and service conditions in which the transformer is working will be
applied (ambient temperature, etc.)

Main Technical features

Page 11 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

The transformers will be three-phase oil insulated with Oil Natural Air Natural cooling (ONAN) for outdoor
installation in the shadow. These transformers will be connected to the 11kV Network having a no load voltage
on secondary of 415VAC at 50 Hz.

The neutral points of the secondary side (415VAC) will be solidly earthed to satisfy the requirements of the TN
Earthing System.

These transformers will be step down from MV to LV and will be fitted with off-circuit tap changing facilities
of range ±5% in 2.5% steps.

Generally, the transformers will be fed in MV via cables whereas the LV side will be connected to the MCCs
through bus bars.

7. LV SWITCHGEARS / MCCS
Main Low Voltage switchgears are fed from 2 x 110% rated transformers at 400VAC and are split into half-bars
through a bus coupler.

The system is fitted with an automatic changeover that would close the coupler and open the incomer under a
loss of supply in one of the sides. Upon restoration of the electrical supply, the changeover to normal situation
will be done manually. To avoid the paralleling of the transformers feeding the assembly, the system has
interlocks so only 2 out of the 3 incomers/coupler can be closed at the same time.

Main Technical features

Page 12 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Motor Control Centre assemblies will be draw out type with degree of protection of IP 41. The design of low
voltage switch-gear and control gear will comply with IEC 60439-l with a 3b construction form and for a
maximum ambient temperature of 50 ºC.

The MCCs house the DOLs, and the feeders to VSDs, Motorised Valves, Distribution Boards, Vendor Panels
and Local Control Panels.

VSDs up to 45kW will be installed in Form 1 type separated panels, grouping various VSDs in the same column
taking into consideration the limitations in number due to the heat loss dissipation. Larger VSDs (above 45kW)
will be installed independently as stand-alone type inside the same electrical rooms.

All Circuit Breakers of 1,250 A and above will be of air type (ACB). Breakers below this size will be MCCB or
MCB depending of the size and protection requirements.

8. LOW VOLTAGE VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES


Low Voltage VSDs above 45 kW will be installed in individual stand-alone panels, whereas VSDs 45 kW and
smaller will be grouped in Form 1 type panels separated from the MCC.

The technology used for the VSD Drives will be as follows:

• Power Rating below 110kW – 6 Pulse.


• Power Rating 110kW and above - Low Harmonics, IGBT Bridge.

9. UPS AND DC SYSTEM


9.1. GENERAL

The design of the electrical and control systems of the plant requires two different systems for safe power. A
DC system will be provided for the 110VDC MV switchgear control and protection and automatic transfer
system. An AC UPS system will be provided for 230VAC used for DCS and Instrumentation. Additional power
supplies will be included in the DCS system to convert 230VAC to 24VDC.

Page 13 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

DC & AC UPS systems will be fed from the essentials bus-bar which is supplied from diesel generator in case
of loss of supply. This will be considered when selecting the autonomy of these systems.

9.2. UPS

This section is intended to provide basis for sizing and selection of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) units.

An UPS shall be provided where it is necessary to maintain a no-break supply to instrumentation, PLCs, servers,
computer workstations, telecommunication systems, network systems and alarm systems etc.

The following shall be considered while selecting the UPS.

1) UPS Type: Solid State Regulated


2) Battery Type: Ni-Cd
3) Back-up Time: 2 Hour

The formula for determining KVA rating of the UPS is:

KVAUPS = DM x LF x √ (∑KW) 2 + (∑KVAr) 2

Where kVAUPS -is the required rating of the UPS

DM -is the factor for 10% design margin = 1.1

LF -is the overall load factor = 1

∑kW -is the sum of active components of individual loads

∑kVAr -is the sum of reactive components of individual loads

The Capacity of the Battery will be determined as per the design basis briefed in Section 10.3.

Main Technical features

Page 14 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

The output voltage of this system will be 400VAC (3 phases + neutral) or 230VAC (phase +neutral) depending on
the power rating of the selected UPS. In any case 230VAC will be used for DCS power (including
instrumentation, work stations, servers, communications, etc.). The 24V DC required for instrumentation and
control equipment will be obtained from this system via redundant power supplies and redundant diode bridges.

The AC UPS will be complete with Changer and manual bypass switch to isolate the entire UPS for
maintenance while maintaining downstream supply. Each UPS unit will be provided with static bypass.

The AC UPSs will be based on parallel redundant configuration with multiple UPS modules with a common
battery bank. The autonomy of the battery will be of 2 hour.

One of the supplies to this system will be from the Essential Busbar, which is supplied from a Diesel Generator.

DC rectifiers and inverters will be IP31.

9.3. BATTERIES

This section is intended to provide basis for sizing & selection of battery.

The Battery shall comprise high-performance sealed or vented type nickel-cadmium type cells having a
minimum service life of 10 Years.

The battery (110VDC) calculation will be sized on the discharge duration of 2 hour.

Hence the following shall be considered while selecting the Battery:

1) Type of Battery ................................................. Nickel-cadmium (vented or sealed)


2) Life of the Battery............................................. 10 years (minimum)
3) Back-up time ..................................................... 2 hour

Page 15 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

4) Load Cycle ........................................................ As specified above & as required


5) Nominal Voltage ............................................... 110V
6) Max. allowable system Voltage ........................ 110% of system nominal voltage
7) Min. allowable system Voltage......................... 90% of system nominal voltage
8) Nominal Cell voltage ........................................ 1.2V
9) Cell voltage required for charging .................... 1.14V
10) Design Margin Factor (DM) ............................. 1.1
11) Aging Margin Factor (AF)................................ 1.2

However, also the Battery shall be designed as per the latest amendment of IEEE Std. 115.

9.4. BATTERY CHARGERS

This section is intended to provide basis for sizing & selection of battery charger.

The following shall be considered while selecting the Charger:

1) Type of Charger..............................Solid state regulated Float cum Boost charger


2) Float Mode supply..........................Rated current + Trickle Charging current
3) Boost Mode supply.........................Boost Charging current to charge battery from discharged condition
within 7 hours

The Formula for sizing the Float Charger (FC) is:

Current rating of FC = DM x (Ic + It)

Where DM -is the Design Margin (i.e. 10%) Factor = 1.1

Ic -is Continuous Load Current at rated voltage

It -is Continuous Trickle Charging Current

Page 16 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

However, generally the float charger current rating will be taken as 10% of battery Ah rating. It shall be checked
and the rating of the Float Charger shall be decided as per the above formula or here stated general practice,
whichever is higher.

The Formula for sizing the Boost Charger (BC) is:

1.6 x Ah capacity of Battery

Current Rating of BC = -----------------------------------------------

Where , Maximum time for Boost Charging is 8 Hours.

And, 1.6 is the factor as the battery requires 160% of Ah capacity input from the charger while Boost
Charging, to get fully charged from discharged condition.

However, generally the boost charger current rating will be taken as 20% of battery Ah rating. It shall be
checked and the rating of the Float Charger shall be decided as per the above formula or here stated general
practice, whichever is higher.

Main Technical features

The output voltage of this system will be 110VDC.

The DC system will be fed from the Essentials MCC from supply at 400V AC.

DC systems will be based on dual redundant thyristor/SCR bridge type 100% rated battery chargers with normal
and boost charging facilities and two 100% Ni-Cd batteries with an autonomy of 2 hour.

Page 17 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

The batteries will be of the Ni-Cd type for DC & UPS system.

10. EMERGENCY DIESEL GENERATOR


The emergency diesel generator will maintain a safe auxiliary supply in case of blackout conditions, and will
provide emergency supplies for a safe shutdown of the entire RO Plant.

Each electrical distribution system in this project (SP1 and SP2) will have an essential loads MCC (EMCC)
which will be fed from one side from the corresponding LV switchgear and from the other side from the diesel
generator. In normal situation this EMCC will be fed from the LV switchgear but, in the event of a black out,
the generator will energise this EMCC. This solution allows for a clear segregation of what equipment can be
energised from the diesel generator and constitutes a very safe solution from the point of view of maintenance
and operations.

The emergency diesel generator will start-up automatically upon loss of normal power supply but won’t be
paralleled to the network in any circumstance.

The following loads will be connected to essential busbar:

• DC System - Battery Charger


• AC UPS
• CIP Pumps
• Essential/Critical Valves
• Emergency Lighting: these lighting fixtures will be equipped with self-contained batteries so that the
emergency light level is assured during the start-up of the diesel generator.

Diesel storage facilities are sized to allow 12 hours continuous emergency operation. The 12 hours tank is
external of the generator and constructed with double wall.

11. MOTOR CONTROL STATIONS


This section is intended to provide basis for selection of motor control stations.

Page 18 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Emergency stop buttons of the stay-put key-reset red button mushroom head type shall be provided adjacent to
all MV motors. These buttons shall directly trip the motors, prevent a start until reset and alarm their operation
to the DCS. The buttons shall all use a common reset key.

Emergency stop buttons shall be heavy duty type, the enclosure shall be of high impact, ultraviolet resistance
glass reinforced polyester with sun shade. The IP class for emergency stop buttons shall be IP65 or proper
canopy to be installed.

Emergency stop buttons shall normally be installed on suitable steel supports close to the motor they control and
shall be wired directly to the motor starter in the MCC/Switchboard. Stop control shall be wired directly to the
starter circuit & not through the motor protection relay.

All emergency stop buttons shall have ISO metric threaded entries for cable glands. When impact resistant
molded plastic enclosures are used for emergency stop buttons, suitable stainless steel threaded gland plates
shall be provided.

12. MOTORS
12.1. MV MOTORS

MV electric motors will be suitable for direct-on-line starting or VSD driven as required for each use.

MV motors shall be operated at 11 kV for the DOL cases or 6.6 kV for the VSD driven, all of them will be fed
from a 3 phase at 50 Hz supply.

Winding insulation used for the manufacture of all motors shall be Class F (in accordance with IEC 60085) and
rated to Class B temperature rise based on an ambient temperature of 50°C.

The selected enclosure type & materials shall be suitable for the environmental condition and shall be capable of
continuous operation at rated power for the altitude, temperature & other conditions of site and within the
voltage tolerances.

The IP for these motors is IP 55.

Page 19 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Medium Voltage motors comply with the relevant IEC standards.

12.2. LV MOTORS

Unless otherwise specified, LV motors shall be three-phase, high efficiency squirrel cage induction motors.
They shall be suitable for direct-on-line starting or use where necessary with VSD controllers as specified for
each case.

LV motors shall operate from a 400 V, 3 phase supply as specified in the relevant data sheets.

Winding insulation used for the manufacture of all motors shall be Class F (in accordance with IEC 60085) and
rated to Class B temperature rise based on an ambient temperature of 50°C unless specified otherwise.

Low Voltage motors comply with the relevant IEC standards.

The selected enclosure type & materials shall be suitable for the environmental condition and shall be capable of
continuous operation at rated power for the altitude, temperature & other conditions of site and within the
voltage tolerances.

The IP for these motors shall be IP 55.

13. POWER, CONTROL & INSTRUMENTATION CABLES


This section is intended to provide basis for sizing and selection of Power, Control & Instrumentation Cables.

All cables will be of copper conductor.

Cable sizes in conjunction with electrical-plant operating characteristics will ensure the maximum circuit volt
drops are not greater than:

Page 20 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

1) main feeder cables to and between system switchboards at rated circuit current: 2%
2) feeder circuits from control switchgear and panels to terminal equipment at rated load current: 3%
3) the transient voltage depression at the started motor terminals is not greater than 15%
4) the transient voltage depression at the bus bars of any power system switchboard does not exceed
10%

The minimum conductor size of the control cable is 1.5Sq.mm copper for all controls & indications except for
Current Transformer Connections for which the minimum conductor size will be 2.5Sq.mm copper.

Method of Cable Installation

Cables are envisaged to install according to the following methods:

1. Outdoor below ground: in duct-banks


2. Outdoor above ground: in trays or trunks
3. Indoor: in trays or trunks or conduits

13.1. MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLES

The Medium Voltage cables will be single core Cu/XLPE 8.7/15 kV (for 11kV rated services) and 6/10kV (for
6.6kV rated services) as per IEC 60502-2.

The conductor is of round, compacted and stranded plain copper Class-2 as per IEC 60228. The insulation is
high quality, thermosetting, cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) compound rated 90ºC. Steel or aluminium
armour wires will be applied all-round the cable with a lay. The oversheath will be a layer of PVC.

13.2. LOW VOLTAGE CABLES

All low voltage power cables will be bare stranded copper conductor with XLPE insulation, steel or aluminium
wire armour and PVC (Type 9) oversheath with insulation level of 0.6/1 kV.

Page 21 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Cable color code will comply with IEC Standards.

13.3. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL CABLES

Control and instrumentation cables will be multi-core, PVC insulated type. Cables for analogue signals will
have a common screen of metal tape, cores will be twisted by pairs, each pair will be separately screened.

14. CABLE RACEWAYS


Cable trays will be made of Hot Galvanized Steel.

The transmission cables of analogical signals will be laid on trays different than the power cables to avoid any
electromagnetic interference

Power and control cables will be run on separate trays with a distance of 300 mm. Medium voltage cables will
be separated from other cables at least by 300 mm.

Wherever this is not possible, low voltage cables may be laid in the same ladder than communication cables
with a grounded barrier between them, at a distance not less than 50mm.

Cable trays as well as their fittings and supports will be connected to the earth system.

External cable trays will be provided with covers.

20% spare capacity will be provided for future cable requirements.

Cable distribution arrangements in cable trays will be done under the following conditions:

• Single conductor power cables (95 mm2 and higher) are always laid in one row within a cable tray.

Page 22 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

• Multiconductor cables (cross-section area below 95 mm2) will be laid in more than one row or in a
single depending on the de-rating factors to be applied in each case and the resulting cable cross-section
area.
• Command, instrumentation and control cables can be laid in more than one row within a cable tray.
• The maximum cross sectional occupation of a cable tray will always be at any case 40%.

15. EARTHING SYSTEM AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION


This section is intended to provide basis for sizing and selection of Earthing System.

A complete and fully interconnected earthing installation comprising earth electrodes, earthing terminals and all
earthing, protective and equipotential bonding conductors will be considered.

The following shall be considered for selection of earthing system.

• 2 separate earthing systems will be considered:


o Protective earth: all electrical equipment such as motors, transformers, switchboards, control
boards, relay and auxiliary relay boards, and all other subsidiary electrical equipment, as well as
all metal parts of the civil structure which might be subject to earth fault currents shall be
connected to this network. This earthing system has been designed for all voltages electrical
equipment (protective earthing, equipotential earthing and bonding), neutral points of
transformers and lightning protection.
o Instrument clean earth.

The earthing method and systems will conform to IEEE 80 requirements.

The system will mainly comprise a mesh grid directly buried at 0.8 m in the ground and a set of raisers,
connecting all electrical equipment and all metallic frames to the earthing grid forming an equipotential bonding
system.

The earthing conductor will be stranded copper conductor.

Page 23 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

The earthing installation will comprise the following components:

• Buried earth mesh: A mesh of bare copper wire or strip is established over the site buried at a depth of
0.8 meters, with the mesh spacing as necessary to control step and touch voltage. This mesh is bonded
to all conducting structures and the other components of the earthing system.
• Earth rings in buildings and Plant areas: Exposed copper wire or strip conductor will be affixed to the
plant areas interior of buildings or structures for bonding to the enclosures of switchboards, etc.
• Earth electrodes: To ensure the lowest possible resistance to earth, and to lower surge impedances for
lightning protection, buried electrodes will be provided.
• Bonding conductors: These may comprise bare or insulated copper conductor, and are required to
interconnect all the components of the earthing system and electrical apparatus.

The design of the components of the earthing system, in particular the sizes of earth conductors, will be such as
to accommodate the maximum prospective short circuit currents, for a time compatible or longer than the rated
short time withstand capability of the electrical switchgear.

The RO Plant earthing system design will be coordinated with Main Substation earthing system design. Ground
earth resistivity study at site shall be conducted for designing an effective earthing system. Values of earth
resistivity reports shall be considered for calculation of earthing system resistance. All this should be
coordinated with Main Substation designer.

All heavy current electrical equipment will be connected to the earth system by means of a duplicated
conductor, each one sized to carry the maximum current for the specified duration.

A lightning protection system will be considered. It has been designed according to IEC 1024 or according to
IEC/BSEN 62305. The lightning protection will be connected to the earthing system.

Page 24 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Page 25 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

ATTACHMENT I
STANDARDS, CODES AND REGULATIONS

Page 26 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

Medium Voltage Switchgears

• IEC 60298: A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to
and including 52 kV
• IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Common specifications
• IEC 62271-200 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - A.C. metal- enclosed switchgear and
controlgear for rated voltages above 1 kV and up to and including 52 kV
• IEC 62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Alternating current circuit-breakers
• IEC 62271-102 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear – Alternating current disconnectors and
earthing switches
• IEC 62271-105 High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - 105: Alternating current switch-fuse
combinations
• IEC 60168 Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of ceramic material or glass for systems with
nominal voltages greater than 1000 V
• IEC 60044-1 Instrument transformers - Current transformers
• IEC 60044-2 Instrument transformers - Inductive voltage transformers
• IEC 60099-4 Surge arresters - Metal-oxide surge arresters without gaps for a.c. systems

Medium Voltage Cables

• IEC 60502-2: Cables for Rated Voltages from 6 kV up to 36 kV

11/0.415kV Distribution Transformers

• IEC 60076 Power transformers

Low Voltage Distribution Switchgear

Page 27 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211001 Electrical Design Criteria Rev. 1 / A 30/06/2015

• IEC 60439-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies - Type- tested and partially type-
tested assemblies

Low Voltage Cables

• IEC 60502-1: Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3,6 kV)

Emergency Diesel Generator

• IEC 60034-1 Rotating electrical machines - Rating and performance


• ISO 8528-1 Reciprocating internal combustion engine driven alternating current generating sets -
Application, ratings and performance

Earthing

• IEEE 80 Guide for Safety in Alternating-Current Substation Grounding


• IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a
Ground System

Motors

• IEC 60072 Dimensions and output series for rotating electrical machines
• IEC 60034 Rotating electrical machines (series)
• IEC 60085 Electrical insulation – Thermal evaluation and designation
• IEC 60394 Varnished fabrics for electrical purposes
• IEC 60751 Industrial platinum resistance thermometer and platinum temperature sensors
• IEC 60529 Classification of Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosure (IP code)
• ISO 1940-1 Mechanical vibration; Balance quality requirements of rigid rotors; Part 1: Determination of
permissible residual unbalance

Page 28 of 28
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

Document No. RAFA3-AAE-211090

Document Title OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


TTCL Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001

TTCL Job No. F-043


AA Job No.155301

Total 63 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

2/A 07-04-2016 Issued For


CS MA RA MS
Construction
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 10
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


2/A 07-04-2016 Issued For Construction
1/A 05-Oct-15 For Review
0/A 24-Jul-15 For Review

Page 2 of 10
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................4

1.1. COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS & REGULATIONS.............................................4

1.2. SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL SOFTWARES.................................................................................5

2. DESIGN BASIS AND PARAMETERS...........................................................................................5

2.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................5

2.2. ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM ...........................................................................................5

2.2.1. SUPPLY: ALTERNATING CURRENT ............................................................................5

2.2.2. SUPPLY: DIRECT CURRENT..........................................................................................6

2.3. LIGHTING SYSTEM ................................................................................................................7

Page 3 of 10
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

1. INTRODUCTION

This document includes the description of the general criteria for Outdoor Lighting in the RAS ABU
FONTAS A3 Desalination Project.

1.1. COMPLIANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS & REGULATIONS

The basis for Electrical Design and calculations are set in the following documents:

- Schedule 1 Minimal Functional Specification ( MFS ) for RAF A3 - the New Water Plant at RAS
ABU FONTAS part 7.15.4.
- Qatar Construction Specifications 2014 (QCS 2014).
- Standards relating to Electrical Installations and equipment as issued by International
Electrotechnical Commission (I.E.C.) and British Standards Institute (BSI).
- BS EN 12464 Light and lighting.

Where two or more applicable standards and/or the Specifications are in conflict, the most stringent
shall apply.
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

1.2. SPECIFIC ELECTRICAL SOFTWARES

During the design process following softwares will be used:

- CIEBT & DMELEC, for size of conductors and pannels.


- DIALUX, for lighting calculation.

2. DESIGN BASIS AND PARAMETERS

2.1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The electrical supply to the lighting points will use the voltage 230/400 V from the Outdoor Lighting
Panel Board located in the Electrical Building, which is approximately the gravity center of the
installation.

The distribution will be made by independent circuits in underground layout using PVC tubes ø 160
mm accommodated in trenches protected with concrete (in duct bank).

Conductors will be on copper with isolation of PVC 0,6/1 kV, one pole type RV or similar. Within the
columns conductor of PVC 0.6/1kV of minimum 3 x 2.5 mm2 will be used (section in the columns).

The projected luminaire is made of die cast aluminum pre-treated and powder coated in grey color.
Gear tray is made of formed galvanized steel sheet. Reflector is made of die formed high purity
aluminum sheet, anodized with semi-specular finish. Diffuser is made of molded, toughened prismatic
pattern clear glass. Felt gasket is provided between the Bottom housing and the reflector to seal out
dust and water. It will be post side mounted. For cable entry it will be supplied with 3 x 6.0 mm2
terminal block for cable supply. The lamp used will be 250 W, High-pressure sodium“ HSP” Tubular
lamp.

Foundations of columns of 10 m: size of the concrete cube H 250 0.6 x 0.60 x 0.9 m., at least.

2.2. ELECTRICAL SUPPLY SYSTEM

The following supply system is prevailing in the state of Qatar.

- Voltage: 400 volts AC, 3 phase 4(3 phase+1 neutral) – wire + earth
- Voltage: 230 volts AC, single phase 2(1 phase+1 neutral) – wire + earth
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

- Frequency: 50 cycles per second (Hz), Plus or Minus 0.1 Hz


- Neutral: Full capacity as phase solidly earthed at MV Panel or Main switchboard.
- Voltage tolerance: Plus or Minus 3%
- UPS: 400/230 volts AC.

The Outdoor Lighting Distribution Board shall be installed in the Electrical Building. It will supply
power to different buildings in the plant.

The board will incorporate a General Circuit Breaker for all poles. Each output will be protected by
Thermo Magnetic Circuit Breakers + ELB. The breaking capacity will never be less than 10kA.

The switching on and off will be done automatically from the Outdoor Lighting Panel Board, using a
contactor, controlled by the regulation system.
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

Beside the board and electrically connected with it, this regulation system will be able of receiving the
signal from an external photocell, and also allows the following functions.

- Differentiated Midnight and Whole night Level, without using dual-flow reactors.

- On and off depending on the time of the year.

- Programming in different cycles for each day of the week.

This system provides cost savings by stabilizing the operating voltage, additionally to savings in
maintenance costs by not allowing overcurrent that would short the life of the lamps. Moreover, there
will be a push button for manual operation and a communications line to operate it by remote control.

2.3. LIGHTING SYSTEM

The outdoor lighting installation shall be designed in accordance with the 1 Minimal Functional
Specification ( MFS ) for RAF A3 - the New Water Plant at RAS ABU FONTAS part 7.15.4.

Unless specified otherwise, the average lighting levels for roadways and car parks shall be 30 lux.

The type of luminaire utilized has been selected with due regard to the usage of the areas on the
project.

GE LIGHTING 42639 ET 40 G HPS 250W Post-Side Mounted / Major Road Luminaire

• Type 1: Post-Side Mounted / Major Road Luminaire installed with 250W. HSP tubular lamp
for low loss control gears.
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

384 mm 808 mm

366 mm

The structures of the luminaire is in two parts (housing and cover) in glass fiber reinforced
thermoplastic polymer, injection molded and UV stabilized results in a housing and cover that offers
exceptional mechanical resistance and high resistance to chemical agents.
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

Post-top mounting with a diameter of 42 to 76 mm, by way of a cast aluminium adapter, with the
possibility of adjusting the luminaires tilt angle between -5º and +15º. The housing and the cover are
hinged at the front and secured by three captive springs of the same sort of plastic and stainless steel
springs. Stainless steel screws.

Ballast support board mounted on removable insulating plate, made from glass fiber reinforced
polyamide. Incorporates an automatic power cut-off switch when the cover is opened. Insulation Class
II. Wiring: with silicone wires and PG 13.5, tear-proof cable – clamp for 6-12mm wires.

Optics in Glass, 4mm flat tempered glass lens. Lampholder shall be installed in a device that allows its
adjustment in different positions, which are perfectly defined, depending on the lamp used and the
selected photometric distribution. Reflector: computerized design 99.85% pure anodized and polished
aluminum, with “cut-off” beam. Reflector neck: polyamide, high-temperature resistant. Gasket:
silicone rubber and polyurethane foam gaskets.

Lamp replacement easy, fast and safe by opening fitting head. A support rod activates the automatic
disconnect feature.

Columns will be conical shape, made of hot galvanized sheet steel, minimum 3mm thick, 10 m high
with a 1.5 m arm and 60 mm diameter tip. They will have a base door with security lock and
grounding plate. The spacing will vary depending on the characteristics of the area to give an
appropriate lighting level, although the general trend will be 17 m. All derivations will be set in the
box installed at the base of the column, which will also take the appropriate fuse protection. This box
will be made of HDP Galvanized Steel and equipped with thermal fuses calibrated 2 A and 4
terminals for wire up to 50 mm2.

The incoming line and derivation, from the pit located at the base of the column, will use this box,
from where a cable of 3 x 2.5 mm2 0.6 / 1 kV with thermoplastic insulation will depart to connect the
luminaire.

Grounding will be made using one grounding rod (copper steel coated, 1,5 m, 16 mm2) buried 0.50
meters deep minimum, at least every 5 columns, and the first and last of each line. Rods will be
connected by a copper wire 35 mm2 bare that will run along the trench outside tubes of power cables.
Each rod is connected to the earthing bar of the column using a copper conductor of minimum 16 mm2
RAFA3-AAE-211090 OUTDOOR LIGHTING DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 2 / A 07-04-2016

0.6 / 1 kV with yellow-green coating. In the lighting board there will be a join to the main earthing
network of the plant.
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Document No. RAFA3-AAT-211001

Document Title PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA

Ras Abu Fontas A3 Reverse Osmosis Project


TTCL Job No. F-043

MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-001

AA Job No.155301

Total 377 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

3/A 11-05-16 Issued for AP AM RM RM


Construction
2/A 20-11-15 Issued for Review AM JB RM RM
1/A 18-06-15 Issued for Cleint AM JB RM RM
Approval
0/A 31-04-15 For Review AM JB RM RM
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description

0/A 31-04-15 For Review

1/A 18-06-15 Issued for Client Approval. Modified with client comments.
2/A 20-11-15 Issued for Review. Modified with client comments.
3/A 11-05-16 Issued for Construction

Page 2 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

CONTENTS

1. SCOPE ..............................................................................................................................................6

2. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................6

2.1. SAFETY .....................................................................................................................................6

2.1.1. PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL......................................................................................6

2.1.2. ISOLATIONS .....................................................................................................................7

2.2. UNITS ........................................................................................................................................7

2.3. DEFINITIONS ...........................................................................................................................8

2.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE .......................................................................................................11

3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................................12

3.1. PROJECT MATERIAL SELECTION CRITERIA .................................................................12

3.2. STANDARDS AND CODES ..................................................................................................12

3.3. PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................13

4. DESIGN PARAMETERS...............................................................................................................14

4.1. PLANT LIFE CYCLE..............................................................................................................14

4.2. SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................................14

4.2.1. CLIMATE CONDITIONS ...............................................................................................14

4.3. TESTING TEMPERATURE ...................................................................................................15

4.4. DESIGN PRESSURE...............................................................................................................16

4.5. DESIGN TEMPERATURE .....................................................................................................16

4.6. ALLOWANCE FOR VARIATION FROM NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE ....16

4.7. CORROSION AND EROSION ALLOWANCES ..................................................................16

5. LINE DESIGNATION ...................................................................................................................17

6. PIPING DESIGN ............................................................................................................................17

Page 3 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

6.1. LINE SIZING ...........................................................................................................................18

6.2. ALLOWABLE PRESSURE DROP.........................................................................................19

6.3. PIPE WALL THICKNESS ......................................................................................................19

7. PIPING MATERIALS ....................................................................................................................20

7.1. METALLIC PIPING ................................................................................................................20

7.1.1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................20

7.1.2. PIPE SIZES .......................................................................................................................20

7.1.3. FLANGES .........................................................................................................................20

7.1.4. FITTINGS .........................................................................................................................21

7.1.5. BLANKING ......................................................................................................................22

7.1.6. JOINTS .............................................................................................................................22

7.1.7. BRANCH CONNECTIONS .............................................................................................22

7.2. GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC ..........................................................................................23

7.2.1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................23

7.2.2. PIPE ..................................................................................................................................23

7.2.3. FLANGES .........................................................................................................................23

7.2.4. FITTINGS .........................................................................................................................23

7.3. NON-METALLIC PIPING ......................................................................................................24

7.3.1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................24

7.3.2. FLANGE BACKING RING .............................................................................................24

7.3.3. FITTINGS .........................................................................................................................25

7.3.4. JOINTS .............................................................................................................................25

8. DESIGN OF PROCESS PIPING (ABOVE GROUND) ................................................................26

8.1. GENERAL ...............................................................................................................................26

8.2. PUMP PIPING .........................................................................................................................27

Page 4 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

8.3. RO RACK PIPING ..................................................................................................................28

8.4. LIME SLURRY PIPING..........................................................................................................29

8.5. PIPING FOR CORROSIVE AND HAZARDOUS FLUIDS SERVICE .................................29

9. DESIGN UTILITY PIPING ...........................................................................................................30

9.1. WATER AND AIR SERVICES ..............................................................................................30

9.2. INSTRUMENT AIR ................................................................................................................30

9.3. UTILITY CONNECTIONS .....................................................................................................30

9.3.1. UTILITY STATIONS.......................................................................................................30

9.4. SAFETY SHOWER AND EYEWASH ...................................................................................31

10. PIPING IN OPEN TRENCHES AND BURIED PIPING. ..........................................................32

10.1. PIPING IN EXPOSED CONCRETE TRENCHES .............................................................32

10.2. PIPING THROUGH WALLS AND CONCRETE FLOORS ..............................................32

11. PIPE SUPPORTS.........................................................................................................................32

11.1. SPECIAL PIPE SUPPORTS ................................................................................................33

12. VALVES ......................................................................................................................................33

12.1. INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS .......................................................................................33

12.1.1. PRESSURE MEASUREMENTS .................................................................................33

12.1.2. VALVE ACCESSIBILITY ...........................................................................................34

12.1.3. FLOW MEASUREMENT AND FLOW INDICATOR ...............................................34

12.1.4. LEVEL AND CONTENT MEASUREMENT..............................................................35

12.2. SAMPLE CONNECTIONS .................................................................................................35

12.3. IN-LINE INSTRUMENTS ...................................................................................................35

12.4. TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE INSTRUMENT ACCESSIBILITY AND


VISIBILITY ........................................................................................................................................36

12.5. VENTS AND DRAINS ........................................................................................................36

Page 5 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

1. SCOPE

This Design Criteria shall be used for the development of piping design, piping material specifications and for
the production of engineering deliverables such as construction detail drawings, plans and sectional drawings,
pipe support drawings, etc, for the seawater RO desalination plant RAS ABU FONTAS A3.

The intention of the Piping Design Criteria is to establish a common basis for piping system design, set the
minimum engineering standard for piping, and incorporate the benefits of experience gained from similar
projects.

This document shall be read in conjunction with other Project Design Criteria and Specifications listed in
Section 3.4.

Any deviation from this document is subject to approval from Acciona Agua.

2. GENERAL

2.1. SAFETY

The consideration of personnel safety during construction, ongoing operation and maintenance, in the design,
selection and installation of piping is paramount.

Piping Layout shall assure safe operation and provide adequate access for maintenance activities, minimize
consequence due to fire and avoid congestion.

2.1.1. Protection of Personnel

Emergency showers, eye wash stations and emergency deluge bays shall be designed, specified and located to
suit each particular circumstance and to maximize their effectiveness. Water temperature, deluge rate and
coverage, supply pressure, accessibility and remote indication of use shall be considered.

Page 6 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

All piping trenches or drainage trenches shall be covered to minimise accidental fall risk. Openings in the
grating shall be enclosed in handrails.

2.1.2. Isolations

The allowance for isolation needs to be consider during the design of the plants to guarantee that all
commissioning and operation and maintenance activities can be carried out without exposure to hazards from
the operators.

The plant fluids are divided by pressures and fluid chemical characteristic. The pressure range is from gravity to
70bar and the chemical characteristics from different type of waters (salt concentration) to concentrated
chemicals (Suphuric acid 98%).

High pressure only apply to water flows and no chemicals and are only contained in the RO building between
the high pressure pumps and the reverse osmosis racks.

Concentrated chemical are only contained in the chemical bunds and chemicals are distributed around the site
under its diluted form.

The General criteria for isolations is to provide positive isolations for high pressure applications and dangerous
fluids.

For low pressure applications the single lockable isolations is normally employed by blinds or lockable valves.

As described the case by case basis is considered during the design phase for each area and line, considering the
process, maintenance and commissioning requirements and also based on similar design experience

2.2. UNITS

All units shall be expressed in SI (International System of Units). Exception might be done with metallic pipes,
particularly Stainless steel pipe, as the industrial standard is inches.

Page 7 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

All piping sizes shall be expressed by nominal sizes: DN (diameter nominal) – mm (inches occasionally).

Alternative system can be used for clarity in construction.

2.3. DEFINITIONS

3D Three dimensional intelligent – modelling systems

ANSI American National Standards Institute

ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society of Testing and Materials

API American Petroleum Institute

BE Bevelled End

BOP Bottom of Pipe

BS British Standards

BW Butt Weld

CA Corrosion Allowance

CL Class

CNAF Compressed Non-Asbestos Fibre

CS Carbon Steel

D Diameter e.g., 3D = 3 times Diameter

EN European Norm

DIN DIN Standards (Deutsche Institute for Standardisation)

DN Diameter Nominal

Page 8 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

DSS Duplex Stainless Steel

 Absolute Roughness

ECC Eccentric

FF Flat Face

FRP Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic

GRP Glass Reinforced Plastic

HDPE High Density PolyEthylene

ISO International Standards Organisation

kPa Kilopascal

kPa(g) Kilopascal (gauge)

LDT Line Designation Table

LJ Lap Joint

NDE Non-Destructive Examination

NPSHA Net Positive Suction Head Available

NPSHR Net Positive Suction Head Required

NPT National Pipe Taper Thread

OV Operating Valve

PE Plain End

P&ID Piping and Instrumentation Diagram

PFD Process Flow Diagram

Page 9 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

PSIG Pounds per Square Inch (gauge)

PWHT Post Weld Heat Treatment

RED Reducing

RF Raised Face

SCH Schedule

SCRD Screwed

SDSS Super Duplex Stainless Steel

SI Standard International

SMLS Seamless

SO Slip On

SS Stainless Steel

STD Standard

SW Socket Weld

TBE Thread Both Ends

TOE Thread One End

TOP Top of Pipe

TOS Top of Steel

UNS Unified Numbering System

WE Welding End

WN Welding Neck

Page 10 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

2.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE

Project approved design guidelines, methods and requirements for Quality Assurance shall be used to achieve
the required level of quality.

Project Piping Engineers and Piping Design Supervisors shall monitor, review and control the design and
planning activities of personnel assigned to the Project to ensure that applicable Codes, Standards, Practices,
Specifications and Project requirements are being followed to meet Project quality goals. Design verification,
review and validation (where relevant) shall be in accordance with established design procedures.

Quality criteria shall be regularly reviewed during project execution.

Page 11 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS

3.1. PROJECT MATERIAL SELECTION CRITERIA

The Project material selection criteria–shall be used to for all piping systems. Material Selection for process
equipment to be included in General mechanical specification, metallic piping specification as well as in present
document

3.2. STANDARDS AND CODES

Piping systems, including pressure accessories and safety accessories, shall conform, but not be limited, to the
revisions of the following based on the date of the contract. In the event that standards are revised then this
shall be brought to the attention of the Acciona Agua.

Standards referred to below or other equivalent standard will be used:

AWWA C950 Fiberglass pressure pipe

ASME BPVC Section II Part C, Specifications for Welding Rods, Electrodes and Filler
Materials

ASME BPVC Section V Non-destructive Examination

ASME BPVC Section IX Welding and Brazing Qualification

ASME B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings

ASME B16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings

ASME B16.11 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

ANSI B16.25 Buttwelding Ends

ASME B16.36 Orifice Flanges

ASME B31.3 Process Piping

ASME B46.1 Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness & Lay)

ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose

Page 12 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

ASME B16.47 Large Diameter Steel Flanges

ASTM A380 Standard Practice for Cleaning, Descaling, and Passivation of Stainless Steel
Parts, Equipment, and Systems

ASTM G48 Standard Test Methods for Pitting and Crevice Corrosion Resistance of
Stainless Steels and Related Alloys by Use of Ferric Chloride Solution

ISO 3834 Quality Requirements for Fusion Welding of Metallic Materials

3.3. PROJECT DESIGN CRITERIA AND SPECIFICATIONS

The following Design Criteria and Specifications are referenced by this criteria:

Document Title Document Number

General Mechanical Specification RAFA3-AAM-416001 // A3-GX-MIP-001

Metallic Piping Technical Specification RAFA3-AAT-426001 // A3-GX-MIT-001

Protective Coating RAFA3-AAM-416003 // A3-GX-MIP-003

Page 13 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

4. DESIGN PARAMETERS

4.1. PLANT LIFE CYCLE

In general, the above-ground plant pipe work shall be designed for a 30 year minimum design life. However,
there is a recognition that some piping systems shall be subject to corrosion/erosion/scaling requiring routine
maintenance.

4.2. SITE CONDITIONS

The State of Qatar is an independent Arab State situated on the western coast of the Arabian Gulf. It is a
peninsula covering an area of 11,437 square kilometres that extends northwards into the Gulf for about 160 km
and has a maximum width of 88 km. A few offshore islands also comprise the territory of Qatar. On the
westward neck of the peninsula, Saudi Arabia and, on to its east, United Arab Emirates are situated.

4.2.1. Climate conditions

Ambient conditions in the area:

Max Temperature 50ºC

Min Temperature 3.8ºC

Daily Max Mean 41.6ºC

Daily Min Mean 13.1

Temperature for material balance 27ºC

Relative humidity 88%

Max humidity 100%

Min Humidity 20%

Page 14 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Mean sea level pressure 1019.1hPa / 997.6hPa

Mean wind 10 knots

Max wind 40 knots

Earthquake area UBC, Zone 1

Seismic Zone According to UBC, Zone 1

4.3. TESTING TEMPERATURE

Piping made from PVC, PVDF or HDPE will be assessed for contraction and expansion. The piping is to be
assessed at two different temperatures (Max. and Min. operation ones).

GRP piping shall also be assessed for contraction and expansion at the same operation temperatures, as cover in
Specification for Glass Fiber reinforced Plastic Piping for above ground

Page 15 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

4.4. DESIGN PRESSURE

Design pressure of the system shall never be less than the maximum pressure expected in service. Where a
relieving device limits the pressure, the design pressure shall not be less than the process set pressure of the
relieving device. The design pressure for pump discharge lines shall be at least the shut-off head of the pump.
For positive displacement pumps the casing design pressure or the PSV set pressure shall be used.

Design limits are specified in the piping classes and in principle set lower accordingly to suit the lowest rated
component.

4.5. DESIGN TEMPERATURE

Maximum design temperature shall not be less than the Maximum Operating Temperature expected in service.
Where information on the actual design temperature is not available, the Maximum Operating Temperature shall
be increased by a minimum design margin of 5°C for all process lines.

Design margins, as applicable, shall be added to allow for solar radiation, ambient conditions, and start-
up/shutdown conditions, Temperature de-ratings specially on thermoplastics shall be considered

The design temperature shall be used to determine the design allowable stresses for the selected material in
accordance with the design code.

4.6. ALLOWANCE FOR VARIATION FROM NORMAL OPERATING TEMPERATURE

For start-up, shutdown or abnormal operation, the pressure and temperature, or both, may be allowed
temporarily to exceed the basic design parameters, as specified in the nominated ASME B31.3.

4.7. CORROSION AND EROSION ALLOWANCES

The corrosion and erosion allowances shall be based on the process fluid conditions and shall be as indicated in
the Piping Material Class Specifications.

Corrosion allowance shall be as specified for each specific piping system.

Page 16 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

There shall be no corrosion allowance applied to Super Duplex or Stainless steel piping.

No corrosion or erosion allowance has been applied to PVC-U, PVC-C, PVDF, PE100, ABS or Polypropylene.
However, In order to provide structural strength of PVC-U/C piping a minimum of Schedule 40 shall be used
(or PN10)

An internal corrosion barrier shall be applied to all GRP piping. This inner layer of GRP represents a chemical
barrier which is not included in the pressure calculations for the piping and protects the structural thickness from
the fluid effect.

5. LINE DESIGNATION

The lines shall be designated with line numbers and shall be shown on all P&IDs and piping drawings.

The method of designation is according to project requirements.

The valves shall be designated with valve numbers and shall be shown on all P&IDs and piping drawings. The
valve numbers are included in the Specification for Manual Valves

6. PIPING DESIGN

Piping design shall be carried out in conjunction with the relevant disciplines as process design, Mechanical
design, etc and covering all requirements from this both disciplines.

During piping layout design special attention must be taken to the accessibility, constructability and
maintainability of the installation.

Page 17 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Reviews with these aspects in mind will be carried out throughout the design development.

Piping design will be carried out using 3D modelling software, the software will be CATIA V21; some small
piping (below DN50 for SS and below DN80 for other materials) could be model for guidance and initial
material take-off but will be specified as site run according to relevant design engineering advice.

6.1. LINE SIZING

Lines shall be designed to convey the designated quantity of fluid (liquid or gas) at an economical velocity, so
that the selected pumps are of lower size and energy consumption.

Lines shall be selected with consideration of the pipe relative roughness (/d) in order to absorb the minimum
pumping energy.

The following velocities are a guide for initial line sizing and the process group shall confirm the actual velocity
to be considered:

Water and Other Pumped Liquids 1-4 m/s

Gravity Flow Lines By calculation

Pressure Fed Drain Lines 2 m/s

Air, Gas 10-20 m/s

Vacuum Line <15 m/s

Concentrated (98%) Sulphuric Acid <0.6 m/s

The actual line size shall be determined based on the allowable pressure drop, transient conditions (gravity
lines), other velocity information, cost analysis and process requirement.

Page 18 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

It should be noted that the above figures are not applicable for two-phase flow and pressure relief systems which
will be sized based on actual contents and pressure drop requirements.

6.2. ALLOWABLE PRESSURE DROP

Process critical piping systems shall be fully analysed (and sizes confirmed) for pressure losses resulting from
friction, elevation and pipe fittings.

The actual pressure drop, and hence line size, shall be confirmed with detailed calculations of process critical
lines.

6.3. PIPE WALL THICKNESS

Unless notified otherwise, the calculation of minimum required wall thickness for metallic piping shall be
calculated in accordance with the requirements of ASME B31.3 or other international equivalent standard.

For threaded pipe, the thread root wall thickness shall be used to calculate the necessary pressure containment
wall thickness. For cut grooved pipe, for use with pressure couplings, the wall thickness for pressure
containment shall be reduced by the depth of the cut groove.

Pressure ratings for GRP pipes are based on calculations performed under AWWA C950 by the GRP piping
supplier. Reference to relevant standard shall be made for design strain values and project preferences

Page 19 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

7. PIPING MATERIALS

7.1. METALLIC PIPING

7.1.1. General

Selection and specification of material shall take account of the following:

- Fluid conditions (e.g., % solids, pH levels, chloride levels, erosiveness).


- Phenomena such as galvanic and other forms of localized corrosion.
- Environmental and Stress Corrosion Cracking.
- Intergranular Corrosion.
- Final material selection shall be specified in particular specifications and data sheets.

Pipes incorporating longitudinal or spiral welded seams shall be subject to appropriate testing. This testing
should be performed in the pipe mills. Further testing shall be carried out on site after fabrication and
installation of piping spools.

7.1.2. Pipe Sizes

Buried lines shall typically have a minimum size of DN 50 for mechanical strength purposes.

7.1.3. Flanges

7.1.3.1 Flange Standards

Flanges and blanks for metallic piping in sizes up to DN 600 shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5, and on
lines larger than DN 600, ASME B16.47, Series A flanges shall be used.

Page 20 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

7.1.3.2 Flange Types

Flanges should normally be slip on or weld neck type up to Class 150. Weld neck flanges are only to be used
where welding directly to butt weld fittings such as an elbow or tee.

For Class 600, only weld neck flanges shall be used.

Steel flanges mating with Class 125 non-ductile cast iron flanges shall be Class 150 flat face with full-face
gaskets.

Pipe flange bolting patterns shall straddle pipe centrelines.

7.1.3.3 Flange Gasket Contact Area Surface Finish and Coding

Flanges Class150 to be used with CNAF gaskets shall have gasket contact surface finish of ‘Standard’ Ra 3.2 to
12.5 µm or better.

Flanges Class 300 rating and above to be used with spiral wound, metallic gaskets shall have a gasket contact
surface finish ‘Smooth’ Ra 3.2 to 6.3 µm.

Gaskets pre-fitted with piping need to be readily identified without breaking the flange apart. The outside edge
of the centring ring shall be colour coded to permit full identification of both the winding and filler materials.
Where applicable the colour coding system detailed in ASME B16.20 will be used.

7.1.4. Fittings

Fittings shall conform to the requirements of the relevant Piping Material Class.

Fabricated branch connections shall be permitted, where supporting calculations are provided, as defined in the
branch connection table for each Piping Material Class. The branch table nominates the type of branch for
every combination of header and branch size for each material type.

Page 21 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

7.1.5. Blanking

Spectacle blinds shall be used according to the isolation specification and in the following circumstances:

Facilities are required to isolate equipment for commissioning/ inspection/ testing/ maintenance.

Equipment needs to be completely isolated for entry by personnel (the isolation shall be as close as possible to
the equipment for positive isolation).

Piping systems are not used during normal or emergency operation.

Circular blanks and spacers shall be used in place of spectacle blinds in the following circumstances:

7.1.6. Joints

Butt welded joints shall be used generally for duplex and super-duplex stainless steels. These materials are in
services susceptible to crevice corrosion.

For stainless steel piping in a service not prone to crevice corrosion, socket weld joints shall be used in sizes DN
50 and smaller due to high cost and limited availability of socket weld fittings in larger sizes.

Lime slurry and lime dust conveying pipe fittings shall be flanged where possible to facilitate quick removal and
replacement times.

7.1.7. Branch Connections

Reinforcement requirements for branch connections shall be calculated in accordance ASME B31.3.

Page 22 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Each piping class specification includes a list showing the preferred type of branch connection, suitable for the
design limits of the class. The list shows header size on the rows and branch size on the columns – thus
covering all combinations of header and branch.

7.2. GLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC

7.2.1. General

The specific requirements for GRP piping are defined in the Specification for Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic
Piping above ground. The underlying principles of the above mentioned document are to define conformance to
standards for the GRP piping design and buried piping installation.

Pipe and fittings shall be designed for full vacuum

7.2.2. Pipe

Actual GRP pipe diameters for each nominal pipe size are to be provided by the GRP supplier. Pressure
containment calculations, vacuum ratings, and design thickness are to be provided to Acciona Agua by the GRP
supplier.

7.2.3. Flanges

7.2.3.1 Flange Standards

Flanges and blanks for GRP piping in sizes up to DN 600 shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5, and on
lines larger than DN 600, ASME B16.47, Series A flanges shall be used.

Specific flanges may be used in order to connect to vendor equipment where necessary.

7.2.4. Fittings

Fittings shall conform to the requirements of the Piping Material Class for GRP as outlined in the table below.

Page 23 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Fabricated branch connections shall be permitted provided they meet the piping material class pressure rating in
accordance with GRP specification. The branch tables outlined in the above mentioned piping material classes
outline the project preference for moulded fittings where practical.

7.3. NON-METALLIC PIPING

7.3.1. General

Selection and specification of material shall take account of the following conditions:

- Increase in temperature due to solar radiation.


- Reaction with strong acids and alkalis.
- Compatibility with service fluid.
- Support availability and the facility to absorb the increased thermal expansion of the pipe.
- Effects of ultra violet radiation and fire.
- Creep.
- Cost.
- Surge potential.
- Corrosion and erosion.
- Fatigue.
- Shear Stress.
- Local buckling.

7.3.2. Flange Backing Ring

Flanges in sizes up to DN 600 shall be in accordance with ASME B16.5, and on lines larger than DN 600,
ASME B16.47, Series A flanges shall be used.

Specific flanges may be used in order to connect to vendor equipment where necessary.

Backing rings for non-metallic flanged joints shall be made from polypropylene coated carbon steel, 316
stainless steel, hot dip galvanize (HDG) or plastic and shall be suitable for the plant environment and the
specified design life of 30 years without maintenance..

Page 24 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

7.3.3. Fittings

Fittings shall be injection moulded from the PVC, PE100, PP, ABS or PVDF. Fittings shall be rated to at least
the pipe rating.

7.3.4. Joints

Joints shall be solvent cement socket type for PVC-U and PVC-C piping. Socket fusion joints shall be utilised
for polypropylene and PVDF. PE100 piping shall utilise electro fusion socket welds and/or butt fusion joints.

Socket weld joints shall be minimised for non-metallic piping systems.

Page 25 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

8. DESIGN OF PROCESS PIPING (ABOVE GROUND)

8.1. GENERAL

Piping shall be routed with adequate flexibility and shall allow safe and easy access for maintenance (e.g.,
crane, trucks, scissor lift, forklift). Removal and replacement of equipment shall be made with a minimum
disruption of piping – including the support of free standing pipe when disconnected from equipment. Pipe
routing should not create unnecessary hazards e.g. trip hazard etc.

Changes in pipe direction shall use standard bend angles

Piping shall be sloped where indicated on the P&IDs to provide drainage of lines. The required slope shall be as
shown on the P&IDs isometrics or other project drawings

Screwed pipe joints where approved shall be NPT.

Piping shall be designed with a minimum of high points and low points. Where they do occur, the piping
system shall be provided with air vent and drain connections as the table below.

Line Size Drain Size Vent Size

≤ DN50 DN20 DN15

DN80 – DN200 DN25 DN15

DN250 – DN400 DN40 DN25/DN15 for high pressure

DN450 – DN600 DN50 DN25/DN15 for high pressure

DN650 – DN1000 DN80 DN25

DN1050 – DN1500 DN100 DN40

Page 26 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

8.2. PUMP PIPING

Piping at pumps shall be sufficiently flexible and adequately supported to prevent the equipment nozzles from
being subjected to any load that could disturb the alignment or internal clearances or otherwise affect the
equipment and jeopardise operation. Flexible joints shall be used if recommended by piping stress analyses for
specific installations.

The surrounding piping shall be routed to allow the removal of pump casings and internals with a minimum or
no disturbance of piping.

Suction pipe size shall be designed to avoid deposition of solids in the pipe. E.g. sludge piping. Suction lines
shall be designed so that there are no pockets where vapor or gas can collect.

Multiple pumps operating simultaneously shall preferably have a separate suction line to each pump.

Ancillary cabling and piping shall be installed so as not to interfere with maintenance of the pumps wet end.

Reducers shall be adjacent to nozzles.

Discharge lines of reciprocating pumps shall be considered as being in vibrating service. The lines shall be
adequately restrained. If required, vibration dampers shall be used for all lines in vibratory services.

Positive displacement pumps shall be provided with a full capacity relief valve between the pump discharge and
the first block valve.

Block, check, drain and instrument valves in the pump piping shall be accessible for manual operation.

Page 27 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Low points and dead ends in suction and discharge lines of pumps shall be provided with valved drain
connections. Slurry lines shall be routed without any deadlegs or pockets.

Overhead pump suction lines shall be arranged to drain from the equipment towards the pump.

Pumps shall have suction and discharge valves as close to the pump nozzles as practical and a check valve. High
pressure pumps will be fitted with a discharge dual plate check valve and a modulating plug valve for start-up
pressure curve control

Pump suction and delivery lines shall have pressure connections as indicated on P&IDs.

Water required for bearings, glands etc. shall be piped separately with an isolation valve near the point of
supply to the pump.

8.3. RO RACK PIPING

Each RO rack riser pipe shall have multiple branches to service each level of the rack. Each of these branches
shall incorporate a coupling for connection to the pressure vessels

The couplings shall be used to protect the RO pressure vessel nozzles from excessive force, vibration or
misalignment and provide access for maintenance of the pressure vessel.

The couplings shall use a cut groove system. Rolled groove shall not be accepted. Each coupling shall be
manufactured from either Superduplex/duplex stainless steel or 316 stainless steel depending on the service.

The RO rack piping shall be arranged in a way that allows the access to any one RO pressure vessel without the
disturbing the pressure vessels next to it.

Page 28 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Thermoplastic piping on the RO rack shall be designed with unions to allow easy removal of each pressure
vessel.

8.4. LIME SLURRY PIPING

The piping shall be designed to reduce the risk of blockage and minimise wear in the Lime Slurry and Milk of
Lime lines. To achieve this, the following guidelines are recommended.

- Use long radius bends typically.


- No pockets, No dead legs.
- Use of wear resistant materials
- Flanged fittings where possible.

8.5. PIPING FOR CORROSIVE AND HAZARDOUS FLUIDS SERVICE

Design of piping carrying acid and hazardous fluids shall incorporate the safety requirements outlined in Project
documents. The flanged connections shall be kept minimum to avoid the risk of personnel contacting leaking
fluids. Valves in piping carrying hazardous material shall be located below head height with easy access from
platform or grade (Splash covers shallbe considered as protection measurement).

Piping shall not run through areas where possible leakage would cause reaction with the materials present in the
area beneath producing toxic gases. If such pipe routing is not avoidable provision for leakage containment
(secondary containment) and leak detection shall be implemented.

Vent and drain connections installed to facilitate hydrostatic testing shall be closed with blind flanges after
testing.

All piping shall be in accordance with chemical supplier material guidelines.

Page 29 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

9. DESIGN UTILITY PIPING

Utility services include plant and instrument air lines, service water, (wash-down, flushing), process water and
potable water lines.

9.1. WATER AND AIR SERVICES

Water lines shall have block valves at main header take-off to isolate individual systems.

Restriction/orifices valves shall be installed in open water outlet lines/to the pump gland seals. Filters and/or
strainers shall be supplied on gland seal water supply lines.

To prevent plugging in small (<DN 50) water lines to equipment, tie-ins shall be on top of the supply line.

9.2. INSTRUMENT AIR

The following requirements are appropriate for Instrument Air piping:

- Drains are required on all Instrument Air headers.


- Branches shall be vertical up off the header to prevent possible carryover.
- HDG steel shall be the preferred material for instrument air, however alternatives as Aisi 304 can be an
acceptable alternative

9.3. UTILITY CONNECTIONS

All utility lines shall be tapped directly upwards from the header. If 90° connection is not feasible, the pipe
shall be connected at least 45° above horizontal. Block valves shall be fitted at the highest point of branch
horizontal run.

9.3.1. Utility Stations

Page 30 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Utility Service hose stations shall be located at around 25 m intervals in process areas so that equipment at grade
or on operating floor levels can be reached using a 15 m hose. Service Water (DN 25) and Plant Air (DN 25)
shall be provided at each utility station. Utility stations shall be shown on equipment location plans.

9.4. SAFETY SHOWER AND EYEWASH

A safety shower and eyewash shall be installed adjacent to any acid, caustic or dangerous material handling
equipment in accordance with the relevant international safety standards. Other safety requirements are outlined
in the Project documents.

The safety shower and eyewash stations are piped to potable water supply. Locations of safety showers shall be
decided based on operational requirements. Stations in finished areas shall be supplied with floor drains;
stations in process areas shall be curbed with drainage directed to a safe location.

Safety shower layout shall provide a clear and unobstructed path from the hazard location to the station.

Safety shower and eye-wash water supply shall be regulated to ensure delivery temperature does not exceed safe
working temperatures. Potable water lines supplying safety showers exposed to direct sunlight shall be insulated
to ensure water temperature is at a safe level Furthermore dead ends towards safety showers and eye wash
stations shall be kept as short as possible to prevent any temperature increase.

Page 31 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

10. PIPING IN OPEN TRENCHES AND BURIED PIPING.

10.1. PIPING IN EXPOSED CONCRETE TRENCHES

Process piping installed in covered but exposed trenches shall include suitable provisions for access – ingress
and egress. Access shall also be provided to enable regular inspection and maintenance of the piping systems.

Confined space requirements shall apply. The trenches shall be designed to protect personnel by ensuring no
accidental access is possible.

10.2. PIPING THROUGH WALLS AND CONCRETE FLOORS

Puddle flanges shall be utilized for cast in concrete nozzles on concrete tanks.

11. PIPE SUPPORTS

Pipe Supports location shall be detailed on plans, elevations and support detail drawings. Standard support
drawings shall be produced where required.

The stresses in small piping connections shall be reduced to a minimum by adequate supporting. Extra supports
and bracing shall be designed to minimize vibration.

Piping around control valves and in-line instrumentation shall be adequately supported to minimize vibration
and stress at these devices.

Piping sections requiring frequent dismantling for maintenance, such as for the installation of blinds, shall be
provided with permanent supports for the dismantled condition.

Page 32 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

11.1. SPECIAL PIPE SUPPORTS

Special pipe supports shall be numbered, listed, indicated on piping isometric drawings and controlled by area.

Each special pipe support shall be allocated an individual reference and sequentially numbered. The use of
unique reference numbers is to assist in the control of the supports during design and construction.

12. VALVES

Refer to the Specification for Manual Valves for valve selection and data sheets.

12.1. INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS

All field mounted instruments including primary temperature elements, control valves, etc., shall be mounted in
a position that shall make them accessible from grade or permanent platform. Access from grade should be
within 1.8 m of grade.

The instrument connection shall be located to provide sufficient headroom and access to permit removal of
inline equipment.

Instrument branch connections shall be provided with isolation valves

12.1.1. Pressure Measurements

Instrument isolation valves will generally be DN25/DN15, single block valves for piping systems up to Class
600 rating. All instrument isolations above class 150 shall be installed with a drain/vent valve.

Connections for other pressure instruments shall be threaded to NPT unless noted otherwise on the drawings.
Refer to Instrumentation Standards from the manufacturer for connection details.

Page 33 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

Local pressure gauges/indicators shall be accessible and viewable from grade or fixed access platform.

Instrument connections shall be oriented horizontally in vertical lines and at the top or side of horizontal lines.
Tappings at 45° from horizontal may be used where necessary to prevent fouling from adjacent pipe work,
structure and equipment. The selected orientations shall permit remote mounted instruments to be self-venting
or self-draining.

12.1.2. Valve Accessibility

Valves shall not be installed with their stem below the horizontal. Special care shall be taken to ensure that large
valves are adequately supported. Valves shall be arranged so they can be operated from deck/grade or platform
level.

12.1.3. Flow Measurement and Flow Indicator

Connections for flow elements shall be in conformance with Instrumentation Standards from the manufacturer.

Installation of flow measurement devices shall follow the manufacturer’s installation requirements. For
electromagnetic flow meters, in non-metallic piping, grounding rings shall be included where required by the
flow meter manufacturer.

Lengths complying with the required straight upstream and downstream lengths shall be specified immediately
upstream and downstream of all in-line flow elements. The flow element shall be capable of removal and
installation as a unit.

Sight flow glasses shall face towards operators point of view and shall be accessed either from grade or from a
fixed access platform.

Rotameters shall be installed in accordance with manufactures recommendations. They shall be able to be read
from grade.

Page 34 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

12.1.4. Level and Content Measurement

Non-invasive level transmitters shall be used in corrosive services particularly chemical supply tanks. Floats
and displacement chambers are not suitable.

Connections for level instruments shall be fitted to permit removal of the complete unit and/or draining.

12.2. SAMPLE CONNECTIONS

Sample points shall be located in a continuously flowing stream and shall be easily accessible and shall not be
located at the dead-end of piping.

Sample connections shall be grouped together as far as practicable.

Sample points shall be identified on P&IDs as ‘S’ items along with connection valving details.

In general, where liquid samples are taken in a bottle, locate the sample outlet above a drain funnel to permit
free running of the liquid before sampling.

12.3. IN-LINE INSTRUMENTS

Level glasses are to be located so as to be accessible from grade, or platform. The level glass shall be readable
from grade.

Install thermal relief valves DN 25 and smaller, in a horizontal position when it is impractical to install in the
vertical position. Install relief valves, DN 40 and larger, in a vertical position.

Page 35 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

12.4. TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE INSTRUMENT ACCESSIBILITY AND VISIBILITY

Temperature test wells located less than 2.8 m above high point of finished surface shall be accessible from
grade or an elevated work platform. Those located in a RO rack may be made accessible by an elevated work
platform. Those located over 2.8 m above high point of finished surface shall be accessible from a fixed
platform, scaffold or elevated work platform.

Temperature indicators shall be visible from grade, elevated work platform, or fixed platform.

Thermocouple and temperature indicators located more than 2.5 m above high point of finished surface shall be
accessible from an elevated work platform.

Local pressure indicators shall be visible from grade or fixed platform. Those located more than 2.5 m above
high point of finished surface shall be accessible from an elevated work platform.

12.5. VENTS AND DRAINS

Vents and drains required for start-up and shutdown of the plant and equipment shall be indicated on the final
P&IDs.

Operating vents and drains are to be located so that equipment and associated piping can be vented/drained.

Operating vents and drains shall be located at high and low points of equipment and on piping where required.
All operating vents and drains shall be provided with valves in accessible locations.

Piping in a long run shall be fitted with low point drains. Drain points shall be located to ensure drain collection
due to closed block valves, control valves, check valves, standby equipment and connected lines.

Page 36 of 37
RAFA3-AAT-211001 PIPING AND LAYOUT DESIGN CRITERIA Rev. 3 / A 11-05-16

For other services, unless otherwise specified, the drainage from sample points, gauge glasses and level
controllers should be led via tundishes into an adjacent drain. In some instances, due to infrequent use of a
drain and benign nature of the fluid, draining directly to grade or draining via a hose connected to the drain
valve to a pit or sump shall be acceptable.

Vents and drainage lines for hazardous or valuable process chemicals shall be accessible for inspection and
maintenance. Unless otherwise specified drainage from such equipment shall be individually piped to a sump
tank or a safe area. Vents and drainage of hazardous chemicals must comply with the relevant Code.

Overflow lines from equipment shall be extended to grade.

Separate arrangements should be made for the drainage containing materials likely to solidify. Provision should
be made for flushing, rodding and high-pressure water cleaning.

Vent and drains specifically for pressure test purposes shall be plugged and seal welded after testing.

Process vents and drains shall be sized as per section 8.1 of this document.

Page 37 of 37
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Document No. RAFA3-AAY-211001

Document Title Instrumentation and Control Criteria

RAS ABU FONTAS A3 REVERSE OSMOSIS PROJECT


TTCL Job No. F-043
MC Job No. MC-RAFA3-0001
AA Job No.155301

Total 91 Pages (Including Cover Sheet)

3/A 04/04/2016 For Construction ANC GDM PM RM


2/A 11/03/2016 For Review ANC GDM PM RM
1/A 16/02/2016 For Review ANC GDM PM RM
0/E 15/06/2015 For Approval ANC GDM PM RM
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION MADE CHECKED APPR’D AUTH’D

Page 1 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Revision History Sheet

Rev. Date Description


0/E 15-Jun-15 For Approval
1/A 16-Feb-16 For Review
2/A 11-Mar-16 For Review
3/A 04-Apr-16 For Construction

Page 2 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

CONTENTS

1. SCOPE ..............................................................................................................................................9

2. DOCUMENTS OF REFERENCE ....................................................................................................9

3. BASIC DESIGN CONDITIONS ......................................................................................................9

3.1. GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATION ...............................................................................................9

3.2. ENVIROMENTAL CONDITIONS ...........................................................................................9

3.3. DESIGN CONDITIONS ..........................................................................................................12

4. LANGUAGE, CODES AND STANDARDS .................................................................................13

4.1. LANGUAGE ............................................................................................................................13

4.2. STANDARDS ..........................................................................................................................13

4.3. UNITS ......................................................................................................................................13

4.4. ZONE CLASIFICATION ........................................................................................................13

5. VOLTAGES TABLE ......................................................................................................................14

6. BASIS OF DESIGN........................................................................................................................15

6.1. SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCES ..............................................................................15

6.2. ABBREVIATIONS ..................................................................................................................15

6.3. EQUIPMENT ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION .............................................................17

6.4. HAZARDOUS AREA REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................18

6.5. EMC/RFI IMMUNITY ............................................................................................................18

6.6. AVAILABILITY......................................................................................................................18

6.7. DESIGN LIFE ..........................................................................................................................19

6.8. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION ..........................................................................................20

6.8.1. Nameplates, Marking and Labelling .................................................................................20

6.9. ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES ......................................................................................................20

Page 3 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

6.9.1. Instrument Power Supply ..................................................................................................20

6.9.2. Electrical Safety ................................................................................................................21

6.10. EARTH SYSTEMS ..............................................................................................................21

6.10.1. Protective Earth .............................................................................................................22

6.10.2. Instrument Clean Earth ..................................................................................................22

6.11. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION .................................................................................................23

6.11.1. Signal Segregation .........................................................................................................23

6.11.2. Signal Conditioning.......................................................................................................24

6.12. SPARES AND EXPANSION CAPACITY .........................................................................24

7. DCS DESIGN BASIS .....................................................................................................................26

7.1. PLANT PROCESS CONTROL ...............................................................................................26

7.2. OPERATING PHILOSOPHY .................................................................................................27

7.3. DCS DESCRIPTION ...............................................................................................................27

7.3.1. DCS Redundancy ..............................................................................................................29

7.3.2. Time Stamp .......................................................................................................................29

7.3.3. System Architecture ..........................................................................................................29

7.3.4. Process Controllers ...........................................................................................................33

7.3.5. Fieldbus Communication ..................................................................................................34

7.3.6. System Hardware/Firmware .............................................................................................37

7.3.7. Third Party Devices ..........................................................................................................39

7.3.8. EDCS ................................................................................................................................39

7.3.9. System Structure ...............................................................................................................40

7.4. DCS INTERFACING...............................................................................................................43

7.5. MACHINE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM.............................................................44

7.6. DCS PERFORMANCE............................................................................................................47

Page 4 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

7.6.1. Equipment Loading ...........................................................................................................47

7.6.2. Operator Interface Response .............................................................................................48

7.7. DCS CABINETS ......................................................................................................................48

7.7.1. Control System Cabinets ...................................................................................................49

7.7.2. Marshalling, Termination and Wiring Cabinets ...............................................................50

7.7.3. Interlock Cabinet ...............................................................................................................51

7.7.4. Power Distribution Cabinet ...............................................................................................52

7.7.5. Fieldbus Junction Boxes ...................................................................................................53

7.7.6. Machine Panels .................................................................................................................53

7.7.7. Pneumatic Panels ..............................................................................................................54

7.8. HARDWARE DESIGN ...........................................................................................................54

7.8.1. Processors..........................................................................................................................54

7.8.2. Process I/O Modules .........................................................................................................55

7.8.3. Analogue inputs ................................................................................................................55

7.8.4. Temperature inputs ...........................................................................................................56

7.8.5. Digital inputs .....................................................................................................................56

7.8.6. Digital outputs ...................................................................................................................56

7.8.7. Pulse input .........................................................................................................................57

7.9. OPERATOR INTERFACE ......................................................................................................58

7.9.1. Programming/Engineering Station ....................................................................................59

7.9.2. Operator Workstations ......................................................................................................60

7.10. PROCESS REPORTS ..........................................................................................................60

7.11. TRENDS ...............................................................................................................................61

7.12. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS ..................................................................................61

7.12.1. Modes of Operation – Sequences and Operational Steps..............................................61

Page 5 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

7.12.2. Operation/Step Modes ...................................................................................................62

7.12.3. Operator Commands......................................................................................................62

7.12.4. Sequence States .............................................................................................................63

7.12.5. Sequence Messages .......................................................................................................64

7.13. CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS ......................................................................................64

7.14. LOOP FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................65

7.14.1. Functionality..................................................................................................................65

7.14.2. Loop type .......................................................................................................................65

7.14.3. Set Point Modes (for control loops only) ......................................................................65

7.14.4. Set point Switching .......................................................................................................66

7.14.5. Output Modes ................................................................................................................66

7.14.6. Trending ........................................................................................................................66

7.15. ALARMS, EVENTS AND INTERLOCKS .........................................................................66

7.15.1. Alarms ...........................................................................................................................66

7.15.2. Events ............................................................................................................................67

7.15.3. Interlocks .......................................................................................................................67

7.16. SAFETY AND SECURITY .................................................................................................68

7.17. SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................68

7.18. SOFTWARE .........................................................................................................................69

7.18.1. System Software ............................................................................................................69

7.18.2. Application Software .....................................................................................................69

7.18.3. Database Software .........................................................................................................70

7.18.4. Communications Software ............................................................................................70

7.19. GRAPHICS...........................................................................................................................70

7.20. DISPLAY TYPES ................................................................................................................70

Page 6 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

7.20.1. Operator Graphic Displays ............................................................................................70

7.20.2. Pop Up Displays ............................................................................................................71

7.20.3. Specialty Displays .........................................................................................................71

7.20.4. Trend Displays ..............................................................................................................71

7.20.5. Point Detail Display ......................................................................................................72

7.21. SEQUENCE OF EVENT RECORDING AND ALARMS..................................................72

7.21.1. Automatic Alarm Suppression ......................................................................................72

7.21.2. Automatic Alarm Reassignment ...................................................................................73

7.21.3. Automatic Alarm Prediction .........................................................................................73

8. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN BASIS ......................................................................................74

8.1. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT .................................................................................................74

8.2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................76

8.3. INSTRUMENTS ......................................................................................................................77

8.3.1. Analytical Measurement ...................................................................................................78

8.3.2. Flow Measurement ............................................................................................................79

8.3.3. Level Measurement ...........................................................................................................82

8.3.4. Pressure Measurement ......................................................................................................84

8.3.5. Pressure Relief ..................................................................................................................85

8.3.6. Temperature Measurement ...............................................................................................86

8.3.7. Local Indicators/Gauges ...................................................................................................87

8.3.8. Miscellaneous Measurement .............................................................................................88

8.4. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION .....................................................................................................88

9. CABLE BASIC SPECIFICATION ................................................................................................89

9.1. HAZARDOUS AREA REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................89

9.2. EMC/RFI IMMUNITY ............................................................................................................89

Page 7 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

9.3. GENERAL SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................90

Page 8 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

1. SCOPE
The purpose of this document is to provide the Design Basis for the selection and sizing of the different
equipment & components of the Control System (DCS) and instrumentation proposed for the RAS ABU
FONTAS A3 Desalination plant.

2. DOCUMENTS OF REFERENCE
The following documents are relevant for this specification and must be considered by the manufacturer when
preparing the proposal:

 Control System Architecture (RAFA3-AAY-601001-Rev0.E)


 RAF-A3 Plant Layout

3. BASIC DESIGN CONDITIONS


3.1. GEOGRAPHICAL LOCATION

This project is a desalination plant based on Reverse Osmosis technology with a water production of 160.000
m3/day

The site is located within the Ras Abu Fontas Power & Water Stations which is located about 10 km from Doha
(Qatar).

3.2. ENVIROMENTAL CONDITIONS

The climate is characterized by hot and dry weather most of year with the proximity to the Arabian Gulf
providing a moderate influence. Extreme temperatures recorded have varied from a low of 0 °C to high of
nearly 50 °C.

Relative humidity is highest in winter, with a daily range reaching up to 100%; summer is much drier with less
humidity. Rainfall patterns are highly variable year to year.

The wind condition is dominated by a local sea and land breeze system that is driven by diurnal heating and
cooling of the land. Winds are from the North and North-west quadrant 50% of the time. Strong winds
frequently occur during summer and winter shammals. The maximum recorded wind gust is 42.7 m/s. Sand and
dust storms occur occasionally, typical of a desert environment.

Page 9 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

In particular the following ambient condition ranges shall apply for the technical design:

Temperature

Maximum Temperature ................................................................................... 50ºC

NOTE: Design temperature Value shall be 40ºC

Minimum Temp ............................................................................................... 2.9ºC

Daily Maximum Mean .................................................................................... 42.1ºC

Daily Minimum Mean ..................................................................................... 11.1ºC

Temperature for Material Balance ................................................................... 27ºC

Design Dry Bulb Temperature (Max) ............................................................. 46ºC

Design Dry bulb Temperature (Min) ............................................................... 5ºC

Design Wet Bulb Temperature ........................................................................ 31,4ºC

Design Dry Bulb Temperature for Air Cooled Heat Exchangers .................... 43ºC

Design Temperature for Air Compressor ........................................................ 45ºC

Humidity

Average Relative Humidity for Material Balance ........................................... 85% @ 27ºC

Relative Humidity (for Air Compressor) ......................................................... 85% @ 45ºC

Maximum Relative Humidity .......................................................................... 100%

Minimum Relative Humidity ........................................................................... 10%

Atmospheric Pressure

Average for Material Balance .......................................................................... 1000 m bara

Nominal Atmospheric Pressure (for Air Compressor) .................................... 1000 m bara

Design Maximum ............................................................................................ 1017 m bara

Design Minimum ............................................................................................. 992 m bara

Page 10 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Precipitation

87 mm

100 mm/h for 5 mins 46.2 mm/h for 60 mins

~ 1.5m below grade

Wind Speed and Prevailing Direction Arial, Bold, English

From North/Northwest

3.5 – 4.8 m/s

Maximum Wind 42.7 m/s

1.2 m/s

Wind Speed for Atmospheric

Dispersion Calculations

Zone 1

Zone 1

Particular attention should be paid to the prevailing severe climatic conditions:

- A considerable amount of salt is contained in the atmosphere, giving rise to severe corrosion attack,
given the high ambient humidity;

- NOTE: Supplier shall be aware of and take into account the corrosion problems to be encountered on
RO Plant Site, especially with equipment installed outdoors and so, all the material provided and
installed must withstand widely these conditions.

Page 11 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

3.3. DESIGN CONDITIONS

Design Climatic Conditions Unit Data

Ambient Air Temperature ºC 50 (dry bulb)

ºC 34 (wet bulb)

Ambient Air Pressure mbar 1,013

Seawater Temperature ºC 35

Page 12 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

4. LANGUAGE, CODES AND STANDARDS


4.1. LANGUAGE

As general rule all the documents and calculations provided by the supplier shall be presented in English.

4.2. STANDARDS

The equipment must comply with all relevant IEC standards and IEEE 519 - 1992.

4.3. UNITS

All identification shall be in the English language and in SI units.

4.4. ZONE CLASIFICATION

Non-hazardous.

Page 13 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

5. VOLTAGES TABLE
The following voltage levels will be considered in the project:

 Ro Plant Connection voltage: ............................... 11kV


 DOL Motors >150kW: ......................................... 11kV
 VSD Driven Motors >150kW:.............................. 6.6kV
 Motors up to 150kW: ............................................ 400V
 Low Voltage distribution: ..................................... 400/230V
 Lighting: ............................................................... 400/230V
 Safe DC: ............................................................... 110Vdc, 24Vdc
 Safe AC: ............................................................... 230Vac

Page 14 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

6. BASIS OF DESIGN
6.1. SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCES

Statutory requirements shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

 RAF-A3 Minimal Functional Specification (MFS)


 All relevant IEC, EN or equivalent International standards
 American Standards, International and European codes of practice and directives.

6.2. ABBREVIATIONS

Abbreviation Description

ANSI American National Standards Institute

API American Petroleum Institute

ASME American Society Of Mechanical Engineers

BS British Standards Institute

CCR Central Control Room

DC Direct Current

DCS Digital/Distributed Control System

dP Differential Pressure

EIA Electronic Industries Association

EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility

EN European Norm (Standard)

F&G Fire And Gas System

FAT Factory Acceptance Test

HVAC Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning

Page 15 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Abbreviation Description

I/O Input / Output

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IP Ingress Protection

IS Intrinsically Safe

ISA International Society of Automation

ISO International Organization For Standardization

KSA Kingdom of Saudi Arabia

MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker

MCC Motor Control Centre

MCMS Machine Condition Monitoring Systems

MTS Client Technical Specification

‘Normen Arbeitsgen Mess Und Regeltechnik’ - Standards Work Group for


NAMUR
Instruments and Controls

NEMA National Electrical Manufactures Association

NFPA National Fire Protection Association

NPT National Pipe Thread

O&M Operation And Maintenance

P&ID Piping And Instrumentation Diagram

PLC Programmable Logic Controller

Page 16 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Abbreviation Description

PSV Pressure Relief Valve

RC Royal Commission

RFI Radio Frequency Interference

RFP Request for Proposal

RH Relative Humidity

RMS Root Mean Squared

RTD Resistance Temperature Device

SASO Saudi Arabian Standards Organization

SAT Site Acceptance Test

SI International System of Units

SIS Safety Instrumented System

SOE Sequence of Events

UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply

6.3. EQUIPMENT ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

Equipment located inside the central control room and equipment rooms shall be in a HVAC temperature
controlled environment.

Field instruments and local panels shall be protected against ingress of dust and moisture and be classified IP65.
Field mounted equipment shall also be suitably protected from direct sunlight where necessary.

Equipment in the control and equipment rooms shall be IP41 or better.

Page 17 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

6.4. HAZARDOUS AREA REQUIREMENTS

The RAF A3 project shall in general be classified as a safe area. Hazardous areas may be identified in the UPS
Battery rooms, Diesel storage areas, Diesel jockey pumps and the emergency generators. These areas are
expected to have minimal instrumentation.

However where specified, equipment for use in hazardous areas shall be suitable for the hazardous area
classification. The preferred method of protection shall be flameproof.

Design and installation of equipment in hazardous areas shall be in accordance with ATEX 137 Explosive
Atmosphere Directive (99/92/EC), the National Electric Code NFPA 70 Article 505 and the Recommended
Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I,
Zone 0, Zone 1, and Zone 2 (API 505).

6.5. EMC/RFI IMMUNITY

Equipment shall comply with IEC 61000 Parts 1-6: Electromagnetic Compatibility of Industrial Process
Measuring and Control Equipment.

All Instrumentation and control system equipment shall be immune to the effects of radio frequency interference
(RFI). The equipment shall be immune to the effects of hand-held radios and mobile telephones.

The Vendor shall provide an installation guide that gives details of physical and environmental requirements.
The vendor shall also advise of any precautions necessary to prevent susceptibility to both RFI and conducted or
induced electrical interference.

6.6. AVAILABILITY

High equipment reliability is of paramount importance and therefore only existing; field-proven designs shall be
supplied. Vendors shall supply hardware and software components that are demonstrably stable and reliable
under the specified operating and environmental conditions.

All supplied hardware, firmware, and software (excluding application software) shall be the most recent “field
proven” revision.

The statement “field proven” is defined as the successful operation at industrial installations for a significant
period of time.

Page 18 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

All Instrument equipment shall maximize the use of standard plug-in electronic circuit cards and other easily
replaceable units. They shall provide comprehensive self-diagnostic facilities. First line maintenance will be
based upon simple replacement of the faulty card or unit identified as faulty by the system itself.

The design of all Instrument control systems shall be such that the failure of any component of the system shall
have minimal effect on the process. The components shall have proven high integrity and be rugged and
physically compact.

The Systems shall be designed for 99.99% availability by the inclusion of built in redundancy for both hardware
and software. This shall include redundant control processors, redundant Fieldbus cards, redundant conventional
I/O cards, redundant data highways and redundant power supplies with automatic changeover to the hot standby
unit on detection of a fault or failure of the operating unit. Each controller in a redundant configuration shall
communicate with both data highways.

Availability shall be defined as:

 TOTP  SDT 
% Availability =    100
 TOTP 

Where:

TOTP = Total Operating Time Period (in hours or days)

SDT = System Down Time (in hours or days)

6.7. DESIGN LIFE

The design life of the instrumentation and control system equipment shall be 30 years minimum.

Page 19 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

6.8. EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

6.8.1. Nameplates, Marking and Labelling

Each piece of major equipment shall be provided with a permanently fixed Traffolyte label/nameplate for
identification. All labels shall be in English.

6.9. ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES

The installation of electrical instrument power supplies and low voltage signal transmission shall comply with
local requirements.

The supply voltage for field or panel instruments will be 24 V DC. Where design parameters do not allow 24 V
DC supplies, 230 V AC. may be used but must be labelled accordingly. In control panels the maximum voltage
allowed is 230 V AC.

Local electronic instrumentation associated with packages or skids shall operate on 24V DC supplied from the
unit control panel. It is the Vendor’s responsibility to derive all necessary voltages from within the package,
from the standard electrical supply. Vendors shall provide power supply units for the purposes of 24V DC
distribution.

Supply and distribution systems for electrical instrumentation shall be designed specifically to avoid
interference and for the safe continuous operation of the plant.

Power supply systems shall be designed to permit their components to be maintained safely while retaining
supplies to the instrumentation.

Individual isolation shall be provided for each instrument or loop to allow for maintenance / replacement.

6.9.1. Instrument Power Supply

Power supply to field devices shall be derived from the control systems. All control systems and
instrumentation shall be powered from UPS supplies.

MOV Voltage: .............................................................................. 400V AC 3-phase 50 Hz

Control Systems Supply: .............................................................. 230V AC 1-phase 50 Hz (+/- 10%)

The Profibus PA System Power supplies ..................................... Bus Voltage 32V

Page 20 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

...................................................................................................... Min Device Voltage 9V

Max Cable length 1900m

Instruments: .................................................................................. 24V DC

Fieldbus devices that do not require bus power shall be capable of operating on the Fieldbus without affecting
the existing supply voltage on the segment.

All Fieldbus devices shall be polarity insensitive.

6.9.2. Electrical Safety

Vendors shall ensure that their equipment is electrically safe. Personnel working on the equipment shall not be
exposed to hazardous voltages.

The covers of all equipment units containing dangerous voltages or other potential safety hazards shall display a
warning notice.

Vendors shall provide, where appropriate, a key interlock system on the equipment cabinets to protect personnel
from exposure to dangerous voltages or other safety hazards during the maintenance or operation of the
equipment.

Vendors shall supply, where necessary, suitable shrouds in all equipment to prevent accidental contact with
dangerous voltages.

6.10. EARTH SYSTEMS

The connection to earth of measurement, control and computer systems shall be arranged to prevent electrical
interference with their operation and also ensure safety of personnel. Particular attention shall be given to
ensuring that the arrangement of earth circuits prevents unwanted earth loops.

The connection of instrument earth systems to a power source earth via equipment circuit boards shall be
avoided. The following separate earth systems may be installed depending on requirements:

 Protective Earth.

Page 21 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

 Instrument Clean Earth.

The common point of connection for the different earth system cables shall be at the plant main electrical earth
bar supplied by electrical group.

6.10.1. Protective Earth

All equipment, cabinets, panels, consoles, operator displays and electrical AC supplies shall be bonded to the
Protective Earth system.

Parts of panels and equipment, doors, mounting plates, internal equipment etc., shall be internally bonded using
copper bonding cables. An earth bar mounted in the panel will be the common earth point for the protective
earth.

Cable racks shall have a continuous earth link along the entire length by means of earth straps at each joint. The
cable rack shall be connected to protective earth at each end and at every 3rd piece of racking.

6.10.2. Instrument Clean Earth

The purpose of this earth system is to protect the control and instrumentation signals from electrical interference
within the plant.

All instrument cable screens and all unused conductors are to be connected to the clean instrument earth system.
The cable screen shall be left isolated and insulated at the instrument end of each loop or cable run.

A separate earth bar, clearly labelled, shall be installed in each Instrument Equipment room. The bar shall be at
least 75 mm cross sectional area, mounted on insulators at least 25 mm from any equipment frame or earthed
conducting surface to avoid any unintentional earth loops.

The clean instrument earth bar shall be connected by two separate conductors of equal length, back to the main
protective earth bus bar for the Plant. This will allow testing of each conductor without losing the earth path.

Each rack within the equipment room shall be fitted with an insulated clean instrument earth bus bar. All
instrument panels in the plant will have an insulated clean earth bar mounted away from the protective earth bar.

Page 22 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Cable screens will be connected to the clean earth bar to provide continuity from the field to the instrument
room. Cable screens are to be connected to earth at the control panel end only.

6.11. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION

The preferred method of control signal transmission shall be via bus powered Profibus PA. Where Profibus PA
is not available, control signal transmission shall be Profibus DP.

Where Fieldbus is not available, conventional electronic hardwired analogue instruments shall be 4-20 mA,
HART protocol for both initiating devices and end user. Where conventional SMART instruments are utilized
they shall be connected conventionally or via Fieldbus couplers.

The power supply for field devices shall be 24 Vdc or 230 Vac.

Digital signals from field equipment shall be 24 VDC with dry contacts. Where conventional Switches are used
for position indication, they shall be 2-wire proximity type (24Vdc). In the case of safety interlocks then
certified fail-safe switches shall be used. Position switches on valves shall be proximity type.

6.11.1. Signal Segregation

Signal segregation shall be carefully considered. The following types of signals shall be run separately from
each other and terminated in separate junction boxes.

 NON-IS Fieldbus

 Non-IS Analogue

 Non-IS Digital

Fieldbus instruments, depending of vendors, shall be grounded at both ends of the loop.

Electronic conventional (analogue/digital) instruments shall be, fully-floating in the field, powered and earthed
only by the system to which they are connected.

Page 23 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

6.11.2. Signal Conditioning

The control and monitoring systems shall support the following signal conditioning functions when they are not
performed in a transmitter:

 Linearization of thermocouple and resistance thermometer signals

 Reference correction facilities for thermocouples

 Square root extraction for differential pressure flow measurements

 Characterization of low level mV sources

6.12. SPARES AND EXPANSION CAPACITY

A design reserve of at least 20 % spare free-space capacity shall be available in cubicles, marshaling racks,
control panels, junction boxes, terminal strips and multi-core I&C cables.

A design reserve of 20 % regarding analogue and binary signal inputs and outputs shall be provided at the
installed cards and modules. The installed spares are additional to, and separate from, those spares required for
commissioning and normal operation. The installed spares shall have fully wired I/O, which shall reflect the
distribution of signal types and electrical categories.

 I/O modules: 20% wired for each types


 Terminal Blocks: 20% wired for each types
 Rack Spare Space of PLC in Cabinet: 20%
 Circuit Breaker spare shall be: 15%
 Power Supply: (redundant modules): 100% above the peak load

DCS shall be designed with the following loading capacity as maximum so that future expansion can take place
without need for additional hardware after commissioning:

 CPU including memory: 60%


 System I/O capacity and other hardware: 60%

Page 24 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

 Communication Network: 50%

These requirements shall still be met after the final commissioning.

The DCS shall allow easy, economic overall expansion for any future projects.

Page 25 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

7. DCS DESIGN BASIS


7.1. PLANT PROCESS CONTROL

The plant basic process control shall be implemented as a Fieldbus Distributed control system (DCS) with
operator stations situated in the Local Control Room (LCR). The system and marshalling cabinets shall be
located in the following areas:

1. A3 Control Room
2. DCS Electronic Equipment Room

In addition all control system I/O is transmitted via a Fiber optic network to the offsite SCADA system located
at the CCR (Central Control Room).

The DCS shall comprise of control system equipment connected to field instrumentation including; control
valve actuators, transmitters and switches in the field. These shall be where ever available Fieldbus devices
connected by bus cables, carrying digital signals for binary and analogue values.

Where Fieldbus devices are not available they shall be conventional SMART instruments connected
conventionally or via Fieldbus couplers.

All data transmission between the LCR, local equipment rooms and data servers shall be continuously
supervised by a diagnostic system. Fiber optic cable systems are preferred for all data transmission.

Package units shall be controlled by the DCS. Any deviation from this requirement requires prior approval from
the purchaser. However should a package require a dedicated PLC control system then the DCS shall be the
primary HMI and operator interface. The package vendor shall provide redundant communications between the
PLC and the DCS.

Failure of any single device shall not affect the ability of the system to communicate with other devices within
the system.

When, in the case of a failure within the on-line component, a switch-over to a redundant component is
executed this shall be bump-less in transfer and within one processing cycle. Failure at a high level in the
system shall not prevent normal operation at lower levels from continuing without disturbance.

Page 26 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

Redundant equipment, hardware and software, shall be continuously monitored for errors and on occurrence
shall initiate an alarm message identifying the malfunctioning component.

7.2. OPERATING PHILOSOPHY

During normal operating conditions the processes shall be monitored and controlled by the operators in the
Local Control Room via the DCS operator workstations.

The DCS will consist of redundant process controllers with input and output facilities to allow connection to
field instrumentation, actuated valves, motor control centres and any other control system provided for package
control outside the scope of the DCS.

The controllers and their associated I/O systems will be located in various equipment rooms which will be
climate controlled. DCS devices shall communicate with each other via a high speed (1 GBPS or better)
redundant data highway. Equipment rooms shall be provided in the following areas of the plant:

 DCS Electronic Equipment Room

The operator interface for the DCS shall be via operator workstations located in the central control room. The
operator shall be able to monitor all process related devices, initiate operating and/or campaign sequences, start
and stop equipment, view and acknowledge alarms and generate on demand reports.

Also, in the central control room shall be able another operator workstation to monitored all electrical
equipment, controlled by Electrical Distributed Control System CPU (EDCS).

7.3. DCS DESCRIPTION

The process control system for the project will consist of a single digital Distributed Control System (DCS) for
the purpose of control, monitoring, alarm handling and data recording of the entire facility, including all
packaged units.

A distributed process control system based on the state-of-the-art technology and proven in desalination plants
during last 3 years shall be used. Software and hardware components used shall be the most advanced version
already successfully used in commercial operation.

Page 27 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

The key objectives for the DCS are to:

 Control and monitor the continuous and sequential activities of the plant

 Provide interfaces to the operators and engineers

 Accurately record and log parameters and events

 Interface effortlessly with other 3rd party systems to ensure safe operation of the plant.

 Interface all DCS based information to the existing SCADA based system located remotely (Central
Control Room).

 Interface all EDCS based information to a new operator located remotely (Central Control Room).

Acciona Agua (AA) will be responsible for providing a complete and fully operational DCS, with all necessary
proprietary and application software, which shall fully meet, but not be limited to, the requirements of this
specification. AA shall provide all necessary project management, purchasing, quality assurance, project control
and inspection services. All equipment shall be supplied ex works. Installation shall be by the Contractor under
supervision of the Vendor.

AA will supply a fully comprehensive set of documentation and test records to ensure satisfactory operation,
maintenance and trouble shooting of the DCS.

AA will also provide comprehensive training for both hardware and software to the Client’s operational,
maintenance and engineering staff.

The system shall support functional enhancements and modifications of the plant equipment by easy extensions
of hardware and software components.

The structure of the process stations shall reflect the functional structure of the plant.

Internal safe design shall be applied for the system and the components. No single failure of a hardware or
software component, on-line change of modules or external influence (short-circuit, wire break, electromagnetic
disturbances, etc.) shall cause erroneous operation or deterioration of any hardware or software system. Fail-safe
shall be applied for control and protection circuits.

Page 28 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

7.3.1. DCS Redundancy

There shall be no potential for single points failures in the DCS System. The system structure shall reflect the
redundancy provisions of the plant so that no single fault within the system will cause any operational
disturbance or spurious operation. Failure of any single device shall not affect the ability of the system to
communicate will other devices in the system.

Following equipment shall be redundant:

 DCS Control Network


 Control Processors
 Communication module (fieldbus cards)
 Power Supply (and Fieldbus power supplies)
 Digital Input/Output modules (for critical Loops)
 Analog Input/Output modules (for critical loops)
 Workstations

Redundant equipment, hardware and software, shall be continuously monitored for errors. An error shall initiate
an alarm with a plain text message identifying the malfunction component.

7.3.2. Time Stamp

Every event shall be time stamped by the DCS in hours, minutes and seconds. The date shall also be provided.
Time stamping shall be accurate to within 1 second.

All DCS, F&G and packaged unit system clocks shall be synchronized using a common GPS based time
synchronization system (out of scope) located at CCR

7.3.3. System Architecture

DCS System architecture is based on centralized (all equipment are in a single room) DCS, with redundant
controllers for different processes.

Page 29 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 3/A 04-Apr-16

The Number of I/O and control loops in each process shall determine the amount of controllers for each main
process.

Document RAFA3-AAY-601001-Rev0.E shows proposed DCS system architecture:

Page 30 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0 /E 15-Jun-15

Page 31 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

All control equipment shall be installed in DCS electronic control room, located on the second floor between
SP1 and SP2 buildings. Supervisory equipment (Process workstations, Utility workstations, Engineering station,
etc.) shall be located at Local Control Room.

Processes to be controlled are:

 Pre-treatment:
o DAF
o Disc Filters
o Ultrafiltration
 Reverse osmosis
 Chemicals
 Remineralization
 Waste Treatment

Main packages included within the scope of supply of the control system and monitoring:

 DCS System Cabinets: process controllers, I/O nodes, etc.


 Marshalling cabinets: termination cabinets for each system cabinet (including Fieldbus terminations).
 Network cabinet.
 Power Distribution cabinets:
o UPS cabinet.
o DC Power Supply Cabinet.
 Interlock cabinet.
 Servers cabinet.
 Local Control Room equipment.
o Operator Workstations.
o Emergency push-buttons for each RO unit.
o Engineering workstations.
o Display Equipment.
o Furniture.
 Central Control Room equipment (EDCS).
o Operator Workstation.
o Emergency push-buttons for each RO unit.

Page 32 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

o Display Equipment.
o Furniture.
 Licenses.
 Engineering & programming
 All other work/supplies needed to meet this specification.

7.3.4. Process Controllers

Each DCS controller shall support a full range of auto diagnostic and programming functions. Configuration of
the DCS controllers will usually be carried out at the engineering workstation in the Local Control Room. In
addition, optimization and adaptation of the DCS controllers shall be possible from a portable diagnostic and
programming station. The Vendor shall detail how the portable station can access DCS controllers with
Engineer level approval. The system shall ensure that changes from the portable station do not create data
inconsistencies.

Process controllers shall be supplied in a redundant format. Replacement of individual failed cards shall be
carried out on line without the requirement to initiate any process plant shutdowns. Switching to the redundant
controller shall be automatic and shall be achieved with bump less control. Diagnostic alarms shall alert the
operator to the component failure and the data link switch.

Controllers shall contain all necessary software and firmware to carry out standard process control and
monitoring functions associated with analogue control loops and sequence logic. Loss of system network
communications should not prevent continued operation of process facilities, however each controller shall be
provided with software instructions to initiate controlled plant shutdown after a specified time delay should
communications not be re-established.

All controllers shall be able to interface with all types of I/O cards used for the project.

Transfer of data between controllers shall be kept to a minimum by means of process unit I/O and functionality
allocation, however this shall be carefully engineered to prevent over exposure of the facilities to a failure of a
single piece of equipment. Where equipment trains exist these shall be implemented in separate controllers.

Page 33 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.3.5. Fieldbus Communication

All electronic transmitters and critical valve positioners shall be microprocessor based smart type instruments.
Suitable programming/calibrating tools shall be provided. DCS shall be capable to communicate with these
devices via fieldbus protocol Profibus DP/PA.

Field Bus Guidelines

Profibus PA shall be operated as subnetwork to Profibus DP. The segment coupler connects the two networks
for data transmission and supplies power to the PROFIBUS PA segment

The diagram above shows scheme for Fieldbus connection:

 Segment couplers (orange) power the segment and provide the connection to Profibus DP.
 Device couplers: Field Barriers (blue), Junction box (grey) and segment Protectors (green) provide the
connection point for field devices.

Page 34 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Process interfaces (purple), connect simple or analogue I/O devices to the fieldbus (eg. Pneumatic
ON/OFF valves).

The Profibus PA DC power supply shall be via redundant PA power supplies or PA power conditioners.

The following factors shall be considered when calculating how many PA devices can be allocated onto a field
bus segment:

 Voltage drops calculations shall incorporate all field bus devices not only instruments.
 The maximum current requirements of each device
 The length of the segment (cable volt drops).

Device Coupler

The PA instruments shall be connected in the field to PA Segment Protectors or Segment Couplers. The device
couples shall normally be located within field mounted Profibus Junction boxes.

The Device coupler shall allow multiple field devices to be connected to one local location. A multi instrument
segment may have several device couplers.

The Device couplers shall have integral electronic spur short circuit protection.

Fieldbus Terminators

Fieldbus terminators shall be used to avoid reflections at the line ends, the bus should be provided with
terminators at both ends. These terminators may be connected as a separate component or integrated within a
field device or junction box.

Field Communication Cards

All electronic transmitters and critical valve positioners shall be microprocessor based smart type instruments.
Suitable programming/calibrating tools shall be provided.

Page 35 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Redundant Profibus DP Fieldbus I/O interface cards shall be used. The redundant cards shall be connected to
provide back-up link active schedule capability to maintain communication with the DCS. Transfer to the back-
up card shall be automatic and require no user interaction.

Profibus PA devices shall be connected by Segment couplers, and will be transparent for controllers.

As general guideline, communication with field elements shall be as follows:

 Valves:
o Electrical ON/OFF Valves (3 Ph): Profibus DP
o Electrical Modulating Valves (3 Ph): Profibus DP
o Pneumatic ON/OFF Valves: Profibus DP (by smart modular terminals in Pneumatic Panels)
o Pneumatic Modullating Valves: Profibus PA
 Instruments:
o The preferred method of control signal transmission shall be via bus powered Profibus PA. Where
Profibus PA is not available, control signal transmission shall be Profibus DP.
o Vibration (RMS) and bearing temperature (pt-100) shall be transmitted by Profibus DP.
 Electrical Distribution: MV and LV switchgears shall be communicated via Modbus TCP (monitoring
only)

The DCS shall support, as a minimum, the configuration of the following DP/PA function blocks in field
devices. The requirement for additional function blocks, if required, shall be identified during detailed design.

 Analog Input Function Block


 Analog Output Function Block
 Discrete Input Function Block
 Discrete Output Function Block
 Pulse Input Function Block
 Proportional Derivative Function Block
 Proportional Integral Derivative Function Block
 Ratio Function Block
 Input Selector Function Block
 Arithmetic Function Block

Page 36 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Signal Characterizer Function Block


 Integrator Function Block
 Timer Function Block

Where no DP/PA field device is available to fulfill a particular function conventional I/O shall be used and
selected on a case by case basis.

7.3.6. System Hardware/Firmware

The DCS shall be assembled, factory tested, and have functional and performance features which will meet or
exceed this specification. The system shall be complete with fully tested mechanical, operational functions and
application software packages, product licenses etc, enabling trouble free configuration, start up and operation.

All DCS equipment shall be powered from a dual redundant UPS with generator back up. Each DCS cabinet
shall be provided with a primary and secondary power supply, each powered from the dual redundant UPS.
Power distribution to all components within the cabinets shall be parallel connections from the primary and
secondary power supply units.

The failure of any single element shall not affect the operation of any item of operating plant. In particular, the
redundant control processors shall be capable of failure without any detrimental change to plant status, sequence
status or control actions at any stage of plant operation.

The control system concept is for a DCS with operator and engineering workstations, printers, data storage
devices and interfaces for external packaged control systems. The interfaces for external systems shall not affect
the DCS security.

Future ongoing modifications, extensions or exchanging of hardware and software shall be possible on line,
without interfering with the running of the DCS.

A dedicated engineering workstation shall be available for engineers and other specialists to perform control,
database generation and editing. DCS maintenance diagnostics shall be provided in the engineering workstation
and shall serve as an aid for system diagnostics and fault location up to card/channel level.

The system application programs for the functional controllers shall be maintained through power failure.

Parts replacement or removal shall not be required in order to accomplish changes in application programs.

Page 37 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

For process critical loops dual or triple redundant input/output field devices shall be provided. Process critical
loops shall be identified by the Contractor, and agreed with the Client, during the detailed design phase of the
project.

The design of the DCS shall provide:

 Operation of the entire facility from the Local Control Room (LCR) + Emergency push-buttons for each
RO units

 Alarm detection and logging

 Real time control functions

 Supervisory control functions

 Real time database

 Real time data processing functions

 Data server for short and medium term data storage

 Archiving of data to permanent media for long term data storage

 Sequence of events recording

 Post incident reporting

 Report generation

 Trend displays

 Process interlocks

 Diagnostics and maintenance functions

 Configuration of Fieldbus and smart HART field devices over the network

 Communication with intelligent field devices for interface to plant asset management system

 On line help menus

 A communication interface to the existing SCADA system (CCR)

 Operation of the electrical equipment and distribution (EDCS) from the Central Control Room (CCR) +
Emergency push-buttons for each RO units

 Interface with other 3rd party systems to ensure safe operation of the plant

Page 38 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Interface with external business systems (including MIS)

 A communication interface to enable remote technical support of the system from the Vendor’s works

Within the scope of the supplier, shall provide two (2) firewalls to connect the redundant networks of DCS and
EDCS.

7.3.7. Third Party Devices

Third-party devices shall be connected to DCS preferably via Modbus TCP protocol. Each system controller
shall have a Modbus TCP card to communicate with these devices. These cards shall be connected to a
dedicated switch. At least, shall be communicated following devices:

 MV Distribution Boards

 MV Direct on-line starters

 MV VSD Starters

 LV incoming boards

In addition, all other vendor packages shall be communicated preferentially in this way.

7.3.8. EDCS

The Electrical DCS shall be computer based for remote monitoring and control the electrical system for MV
system, LV system, transformers, generator, UPS, DC charger and electrical distribution, with following
functions:

a) Display of single line diagram graphical screen

The display shall indicate the status of overall single line and power distribution on the screen. The
status of main circuit breakers, analog data such as current, voltage, real and reactive power, status of
protection equipment, etc. shall be displayed on the graphic screen.

Page 39 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

b) Remote control

The remote control of the following equipment shall be provided:

 MV Switchgear incoming, bus-section breakers, generator, transformer feeder and power


feeder.
 LV switchgear incoming and bus-section breaker

c) Data acquisition and monitoring

The Electrical DCS shall be equipped with data acquisition and monitoring for status, measurement and
alarm data.

d) Status monitoring

The Electrical DCS shall be able to monitor the circuit breakers, transformers, generator, UPS, DC
Charger and distribution board status. When the change status occurred, the change status
symbol/message shall be displayed on screen and recorded with time occurrence.

e) Alarm monitoring

When the fault occurred from the monitored equipment such as protection relay, the alarms shall be
shown and recorded with time occurrence.

f) Measuring monitoring

The analog data such as voltage, current, real and reactive power, etc. will be real time monitored and
displayed the data on screen.

For equipment data exchange and GPS synchronization shall provide the communication between RO DCS and
Electrical DCS networks, including in the supplier scope two (2) firewalls to make this network connection.

7.3.9. System Structure

The Control System shall control and supervise the whole plant for an efficient and reliable operation. Plant
operation, control and supervision shall be based on a Distributed Control System (DCS).

RO Plant is divided in two parts (SP1 and SP2) with a few common processes (e.g. DAF, Chemicals, etc.). DCS
shall control and supervise following main processes:

Page 40 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Dissolved Air Flotation (DAF) SP1

 Dissolved Air Flotation (DAF) SP2

 Ultrafiltration & Disc Filters SP1

 Ultrafiltration & Disc Filters SP2

 Reverse Osmosis SP1

 Reverse Osmosis SP2

 Sludge Treatment

 Chemicals

 Remineralization

DCS architecture and structure shall be similar to that in the process. Distribution of controllers, system and
termination cabinets, fieldbuses, etc., shall follow same philosophy as the process.

According to the proposed architecture DCS will have following controllers:

 1 x redundant controllers for DAF SP1


o Dissolved Air Flotation tanks
o Recirculation pumps
o Intermediate Seawater pumps
 1 x redundant controllers for DAF SP2
o Dissolved Air Flotation tanks
o Recirculation pumps
o Intermediate Seawater pumps
 1 x redundant controllers for Filtration SP1
o Disc Filters
o Ultrafiltration racks
o UF & DF Backwash pumps
 1 x redundant controllers for Filtration SP2
o Disc Filters
o Ultrafiltration racks
o UF & DF Backwash pumps

Page 41 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 1 x redundant controllers for RO SP1.1 (4 trains)


o High Pressure pumps
o ERD Booster pumps
o 2nd Pass pumps
o RO & CIP pumps
 1 x redundant controllers for RO SP1.2 (4 trains)
o High Pressure pumps
o ERD Booster pumps
o 2nd Pass pumps
 1 x redundant controllers for RO SP2.1 (3 trains)
o High Pressure pumps
o ERD Booster pumps
o 2nd Pass pumps
o RO & CIP pumps
 1 x redundant controllers for RO SP2.2 (3 trains)
o High Pressure pumps
o ERD Booster pumps
o 2nd Pass pumps
 1 x redundant controller for Chemicals
 1 x redundant controller for Commons
o Permeate Forward pumps
o Wastewater Treatment equipment
o Remineralization
 1 x redundant controller for EDCS
o MV switchgears
o Transformers
o LV switchgears
o Circuit Breakers
o Batteries
o UPS
o Electromechanical Equipments

If more than one CPU is in charge of controlling the same process (DAF, UF, etc.), division of I/O, control
loops, etc., between controllers, shall not be for process units, but process lines as shown below.

Page 42 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

DAF CPU 1 DAF CPU 2

DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF
13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

Intermediate Pumps
Recirculation Pumps Intermediate Pumps

NO
Recirculation Pumps

DAF CPU 1 DAF CPU 2

DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF DAF
13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01

Intermediate Pumps
Recirculation Pumps Intermediate Pumps

YES
Recirculation Pumps

7.4. DCS INTERFACING

The DCS shall interface with the existing plants SCADA system located at the Central Control Room of the
facility. The DCS shall interface with the existing patch panel and Fiber optic network (24 cores).

DCS shall also interface with existing plant performance management and optimization system located at CCR
(out of scope).

AA will provide independent and redundant smart gateways to the Facility digital control system local area
network (DCS LAN). These smart gateways shall be connected to termination points at or close to the
respective Delivery Point. These termination points will be connected using data communication channels to the
respective control centres as follows:

Page 43 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

(a) Connection to NCC.

For electricity, these termination points shall be connected to NCC; and

(b) Connection to NWCC.

For Potable Water, these termination points shall be connected to the NWCC.

In case (a) and (b) above and at the relevant control centre, AA will implement all necessary modifications in
software and hardware, such as databases, displays, AGC, map board, and such like and provide full SCADA
facilities using gateways connected to the digital control system of the Facility.

Such data communication channels shall be integrated into the relevant KAHRAMAA control systems for the
purpose of monitoring, and in emergency, controlling the Facility in accordance with the Grid Code.

It will be provided all hardware and software works necessary for the integration of the desalination plant and
associated pump house and surge vessels with the National Water Control Centre (NWCC) and the Power Plant
and associated substations to the National Control Centre (NCC). This should include laying, terminating and
splicing 24 core fiber optic cables between the Water Plant, Power Plant and instrumentation/control room.

7.5. MACHINE CONDITION MONITORING SYSTEM

Proprietary Machinery Condition Monitoring System (MCMS) shall be used on selected rotating equipment
which includes RO plant HP pumps.

Vibration and temperature measurements, alarm and trip indications shall be available on the DCS.

The machine condition monitoring system panels, called Machine Panel, shall be located closed to the
equipment. The transducers shall be located on or adjacent to each machine bearing mounted in the housing or
on a rigid bracket.

The Machinery Condition Monitoring System is required to report the status of rotating and reciprocating
equipment to provide:
 Identify deterioration in equipment performance so that remedial action can be taken before failure or
extensive damage occurs.
 Alert the operator to specified alarm conditions requiring investigation.

Key features and functionality of the system will:

Page 44 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Supervision: Global Values integrated on DCS database for trending and historical functions:
o Displacement: Peak to Peak value
o Temperature: Temperature (ºC) value.

The Machinery Condition Monitoring System shall comprise of the following:


 Machine panels located closed to the equipment that contains monitoring modules connected to field
mounted transducers.
 Serial or TCP/IP interfaces from each machinery monitoring panel to the DCS for on-line condition
monitoring and automatic data transfer.

The Machinery Condition Monitoring System shall provide continuous on line monitoring of predefined
machine parameters which shall be compared to predefined software based set points to drive alarm and trip
signals.

Measurements made on different machinery elements such as radial vibration, axial displacement, bearing
temperatures and windings temperatures shall be used to ensure adequate protection and monitoring.

The Machinery Condition Monitoring System shall send all necessary signals required for operation to the DCS
for monitoring and alarm display.

MV Pump/motor:

Pump Motor Motor


Description Units Bearing Bearing Winding Vibration* Location CPU
PT100 PT100 PT100
Intermediate Pumps 5 2 2 3 0 DAF DAF 1
Intermediate Pumps 5 2 2 3 0 DAF DAF 2
UF Backwash Pumps 3 2 2 3 0 UF UF 1
UF Backwash Pumps 3 2 2 3 0 UF UF 2
High Pressure Pumps 4 2 2 3 5 RO RO 1.1
High Pressure Pumps 4 2 2 3 5 RO RO 1.2
High Pressure Pumps 3 2 2 3 5 RO RO 2.1
High Pressure Pumps 3 2 2 3 5 RO RO 2.2

Page 45 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Pump Motor Motor


Description Units Bearing Bearing Winding Vibration* Location CPU
PT100 PT100 PT100
2nd Pass Pumps 4 2 2 3 0 RO RO 1.1
2nd Pass Pumps 4 2 2 3 0 RO RO 1.2
2nd Pass Pumps 3 2 2 3 0 RO RO 2.1
2nd Pass Pumps 3 2 2 3 0 RO RO 2.2

TOTAL 44 88 88 132 70

* Sensors installed only for HP pumps. Rest of equipment just provision.

LV Pump/motor:

Pump Motor Motor


Stator
Description Units Bearing Bearing Winding Location CPU
PT100
PT100 PT100 PT100
DAF Recirculation
5 2 2 3 0 DAF DAF 1
Pumps*
DAF Recirculation
4 2 2 3 0 DAF DAF 2
Pumps*
DF Backwash Pumps* 2 2 2 3 0 UF UF 1
DF Backwash Pumps* 2 2 2 3 0 UF UF 2
Booster ERD Pumps* 4 2 2 3 0 RO RO 1.1
Booster ERD Pumps* 4 2 2 3 0 RO RO 1.2
Booster ERD Pumps* 3 2 2 3 0 RO RO 2.1
Booster ERD Pumps* 3 2 2 3 0 RO RO 2.2
RO CIP Pumps* 3 2 2 3 0 RO RO 1.1
RO CIP Pumps* 3 2 2 3 0 RO RO 1.2
Permeate Forward
3 2 2 3 0 Permeate COMMON
Pumps*
Cavity Pumps to Sludge
3 0 0 0 1 COMMON
Centrifuges** Treatment

Page 46 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Pump Motor Motor


Stator
Description Units Bearing Bearing Winding Location CPU
PT100
PT100 PT100 PT100
Polypack Dosing Sludge
4 0 0 0 1 COMMON
Pumps** Treatment
Cavity Pumps to Sludge
2 0 0 0 1 COMMON
Silos** Treatment

TOTAL 45 72 72 108 9

* Sensors installed only for LV motors pumps actuated by an electrical motor with a power above 100 kW.

** For progressive cavity pumps of Sludge Treatment only temperature of stator shall be measured.

7.6. DCS PERFORMANCE

7.6.1. Equipment Loading

No DCS device shall be loaded to more than 60% of peak of its maximum capacity or throughput capability
under any normal or abnormal DCS condition. This includes:

 Central processing units

 Resident memory

 Disc media

Communications links shall not be loaded to more than 50 % of their rated capacity. This includes:

 Timing and response time

 Control action

The DCS shall, in all cases, respond to any input that requires action by computing the logic and executing
control within 1 second (subject to any intentional sequencing delay). This requirement shall be met

Page 47 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

independent of any other considerations, such as the number of inputs requiring action at the same time, or
operator access to the DCS.

7.6.2. Operator Interface Response

The following performance criteria shall be achieved by the system, under all normal conditions of operation
and under all emergency conditions:

 At least 1 ms resolution time for alarms and events monitoring for binary inputs;

 0.2 - 0.5 s cycle-time or better for closed loop controls;

 1 to 1.5 s to get a mimic diagram on the display upon operator's request for a mimic with an average of 50
variables;

 1 s to get an alarm on the display;

 1 to 1.5 s to get the confirmations on the display upon operator's command from the
keyboard/display/mimic.

7.7. DCS CABINETS

As described below all necessary cabinets of DCS are fitted in the scope:

 Control System Cabinets: Housed controllers and I/O modules

 Termination Cabinets: Marshalling boards.

 Power Distribution Cabinets: Control System, Instrumentation Power and UPS Supply.

 Network cabinets: High level communications (NCC, NWCC, CCR, etc.)

 Interlocks cabinet

 Server cabinet

 Fieldbus junction boxes

 Machine panels

 Pneumatic panels

Page 48 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.7.1. Control System Cabinets

DCS cabinets shall be supplied to house controllers, I/O racks and other system components as necessary.

Cabinets shall be designed to a standard industry design. They shall be rugged and suitable for use in an
industrial environment. Size will be minimum necessary to meet these design bases (preferably 2000 x 800 x
800).

All cabinets by all equipment vendors shall have a spare area of 25% as long as the equipment is adequately
housed, cooling and access for maintenance is comfortable, thought is given to installation and termination of
field cables, segregation between AC and DC voltages is maintained. Front and rear access double doors shall
be used. Cable entry shall be bottom entry with suitable cable clamps. Clamping arrangements shall be the
maximum available within the constraints of standard panel design.

Cabinets for termination of field cables shall be provided for each of the systems described above.

Each cabinet shall be provided with internal illumination and a maintenance socket outlet. Where cabinets are
supplied as suites the requirement for socket outlets may be reduced (for example, one outlet for every two
cabinets in the suite)

Suitable removable screwed lifting eyebolts shall be fitted and positioned such that the panel may be lifted by
hoist or by crane without any other means of support and without damage or distortion to the panel framework.
Blanking plugs shall be provided for lifting eyebolt holes.

Paint finish shall be to the Vendor’s standard, subject to Client's approval.

Labelling and general identification of panel equipment shall be provided in accordance with the project
numbering system. All labels shall be in English, but safety warning labels shall be dual language, English and
Arabic.

System panels shall have degree of protection of not less than IP54 in accordance with IEC60529.

Cabinets shall be provided with door louvers fitted with removable dust filters to allow for adequate ventilation
of the electronic DCS equipment. Where forced ventilation is required cabinets shall be supplied with redundant
cooling fans.

Cabinet layouts shall be designed to allow the installation of a cabinet smoke detection system integrated with
the F&G system.

Cabinets shall be installed in an environment controlled building in the safe area and shall have either front or
front and rear entry doors and shall be certified IP54 as a minimum.

Page 49 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Cabinets shall be fully equipped with power isolators, MCBs and fused terminals for power distribution,
terminals (knife edge) for signal termination and required earth bars for protective earth and instrument earth.

Cabinets shall be equipped with a drawing pocket mounted on the inside of the front door.

Cabinets shall be equipped with a panel light mounted in the top of the panel, and automatically actuated by a
door switch.

Cabinets shall be equipped with 24 Vdc and 230 Vac power sockets to facilitate maintenance.

Communication cables for different communication protocols shall be different colours.

Cabinets shall be equipped with cooling fans where necessary. Heat dissipation calculations shall be provided
for each cabinet, to verify the cooling requirements.

Should it be necessary to mount a cabinet external to the building, the cabinet shall be certified weather proof
IP55 for installation in a non-hazardous area and shall be certified with the appropriate ATEX Ex classification
for installation in a hazardous area.

7.7.2. Marshalling, Termination and Wiring Cabinets

Vendors shall supply cabinets fully wired and internally terminated. Terminal blocks shall be grouped and
labelled accordingly. The cabinet design shall be such as to minimize internal cross wiring.

A means shall be provided for isolating each input in the terminal racks (by using terminals with knife-edge
connectors). Each input/output to the field shall be independently fused. Consideration should be given to
providing a common fuse failure alarm to the DCS for each panel.

A minimum of 400 mm shall be allowed from the top of the base plinth to the first terminal, to allow sufficient
space for cable installation. Front and rear access double doors shall be used. Size will be minimum necessary to
meet these design bases (preferably 2000 x 800 x 800). Every panel shall be included a 100mm plinth.

The use of double banked terminals or densely packed galvanic isolators shall be avoided. All cable cores,
including project spares and screens, shall be terminated. Spares shall be terminated on a common panel earth
bar.

Communication cables for different communication protocols shall be different colours.

Trunking shall be sized to be no more than 80% full; this shall include any allowance for spare capacity.

Panel Wiring

Page 50 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Internal wiring support shall be slotted trunking with retained cover, loose laid and sized for an additional 40%
spare capacity. Incoming field wiring support shall be by cable tray and sized for an additional 40% capacity.

Separate trunking shall be employed for Profibus PA 24 VDC analogue and digital input signals, A.C. power (if
applicable) and 24 V DC power wiring (including powered digital outputs).

Inside the panel, all wiring, cable trunking and accessories must be halogens free.

Terminations

Conductor ferrules shall be connected with the correct crimping tools. Isolating test / disconnect type terminals
shall be provided for all field connections. All field cables shall be terminated on these terminals.

No more than one crimp connection per terminal position shall be permitted. Suitable linked terminals shall be
provided where multiple looping is necessary. Looping wires shall not be used. In line connectors are not
allowed.

Field cables will be dedicated to a particular signal category and terminated in terminal strips identified by their
cable number.

Signal types are as follows:

 Analogue 4-20mA or Profibus PA

 Digital not greater than 24 V DC

 AC Power (if applicable) and Control.

 Control interface cables (serial)

7.7.3. Interlock Cabinet

Vendor shall provide an interlock cabinet to remote control of electrical output circuits of MCC(circuit breakers
and contactors) depending on the plant interlocks.

There are two different types of interlocks:

 Process interlocks: Level switches, pressure switches, etc.


 Equipment protections: PTC, Moisture, etc.

Page 51 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Interlock cabinet shall be groups all interlocks of every electromechanical equipment and in case of an abnormal
situation sends the corresponding signal (normally close contact) to the MCC. The process and equipment
interlocks for each machine (pump, fan…) shall be a serial contact of normally close contact, in case of an
interlock detects, the Interlock Cabinet shall send stop (open the contact) command to the MCC.

For equipment protections (PTC, Moisture, etc.) shall be used suitable relays in the Interlock Cabinet. In case of
relay activation, the stop command will send to the MCC and the status will monitored in DCS.

For process interlocks (Level switches, Pressure switches, etc.) shall be used multifunction timer relays in the
Interlock Cabinet. In case of relay activation, the stop command will send to the MCC and the status will
monitored in DCS.

Emergency shutdown push-button of each equipment shall be direct hardwired to the MCC to interlock the
machine. All emergency push-bottom shall be with double pole and both normally close. One contact is for de
MMC and the other contact is for the DCS.

Interlock cabinet will have a redundant safe AC (UPS) power supply. Redundant AC/DC will be used for
interlock signals.

7.7.4. Power Distribution Cabinet

Electrical supply to different cabinets shall be in the following way:

 DCS System Cabinet: 230 Vac UPS redundant supply from UPS Distribution Cabinet and 230 Vac
single supply from Auxiliary Power Distribution.
 Marshalling DCS System Cabinet: 230 Vac UPS redundant supply from UPS Distribution Cabinet and
230 Vac single supply from Auxiliary Power Distribution; in this cabinet shall be distributed de 24 Vdc
supply for other cabinets, also marshalling cabinets.
 Fieldbus & Network Process Cabinet: 230 Vac single supply from Auxiliary Power Distribution and 24
Vdc supply from Marshalling DCS System Cabinet.
 UPS distribution Cabinet: 400/230 Vac UPS redundant supply and feeders for Instrumentation Panels,
DCS System Cabinets, Marshalling DCS System Cabinet, MV switchgear and MV/LV VFD.
 Instrumentation distribution Cabinet: 400/230 Vac UPS redundant supply from UPS Distribution
Cabinet and feeders for instruments.

Page 52 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Electrical valves and auxiliary instrumentation distribution Cabinet: 230 Vac single supply from
Auxiliary Power Distribution and feeders to electrical ON/OFF valves and instruments.

7.7.5. Fieldbus Junction Boxes

For field termination of PA instruments, polyester, impact resistant, glass fiber reinforcer and IP65 protection
degree PA junction boxes shall be used.

The PA junction boxes shall include the Field Device Couplers:

o Short-circuit protection per output


o Segment protector in Zone2/Div2
o Power, communication and error Leds
o Test points

Each junction box shall be provided with an end-of-line termination device that can be utilized as appropriate.
Tag Plate, grounding bar and surge protection shall be provided for each junction box.

Blank plugs shall be provided for every gland entry that is not used. Each junction box shall have at least one
spare cable entry. Junction boxes shall be mounted on a steel plate and installed on a rigid frame/structure.

Each junction box shall be capable of accommodating a single segment having 8 ‘spur’ connections (including
20% spare).

7.7.6. Machine Panels

For MCMS vibration and temperature instruments, polyester, impact resistant, glass fiber reinforcer and IP65
protection degree Machine Panels shall be used.

The Machine Panels shall include the next devices:

o Panel enclosure, with wall-mounting accessories, mechanized glands in panel and polyester glands
o Profibus DP communication module
o Prewired cards: RTD cards for temperature sensors and 4-20 mA cards for vibration sensors
o Internal wiring between field terminals and cards
o Power, communication and error Leds

Page 53 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Each Machine Panel shall be provided with Tag plate, grounding bar and surge protection shall be provided for
each junction box. Blank plugs shall be provided for every gland entry that is not used.

For each Machine Panel a design reserve of at least 20% spare free-space capacity, terminal strips and multi-
core I&C cables shall be available.

7.7.7. Pneumatic Panels

For pneumatic ON/OFF valves, polyester, impact resistant, glass fiber reinforcer and IP65 protection degree
Pneumatic Panels shall be used.

The Pneumatic Panels shall include the next devices:

o Panel enclosure, with wall-mounting accessories, mechanized glands in panel and polyester glands
o Profibus DP communication module
o Prewired cards: Digital inputs cards for position switches of valves (open and close positions)
o Internal wiring between field terminals and cards
o Filter regulator with built-in pressure gauge.
o Pneumatic valve 5/2 terminal
o Power, communication and error Leds

Each Pneumatic Panel shall be provided with Tag plate, grounding bar and surge protection shall be provided
for each junction box. Blank plugs shall be provided for every gland entry that is not used.

For each Pneumatic Panel a design reserve of at least 20% spare free-space capacity, terminal strips and multi-
core I&C cables shall be available.

7.8. HARDWARE DESIGN

7.8.1. Processors

The processors shall use the latest self-testing technology and be fully proven in the field for at least 5 years.
The chosen technology shall be fully supported and shall have at least a 30 year life cycle remaining. It shall be
capable of having live software updates and be fully compatible with all future planned hardware and software
modifications and designs.

Page 54 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Logic processing and self-tests shall be carried out simultaneously and by the same hardware components.
During each scan the system outputs shall be recalculated by executing the complete functional logic. The
Vendor shall state the duration of the full scan time. No more than 50 % of the processor memory shall be used
on completion of the site acceptance test.
A common functional logic program shall be used for all processors. The programming software shall provide
the ability to program in function block, sequential function chart or ladder logic for quick and easy
configuration and program emulation.

7.8.2. Process I/O Modules

The supplier shall indicate whether anti-static precautions are necessary when handling cards. If such
precautions are required, grounding wrist straps shall be supplied as permanently fixed items.
All I/O modules shall contain galvanic separation of the input and output circuits. All I/O channels shall have
individual short-circuit protection. Analogue modules shall have a 12 bit resolution (4096) or greater and all
modules shall have a processing speed of less than 100 ms.
The safety related output modules shall have separate shut down circuitry which is controlled by the watchdog
module.
The I/O modules shall have the capability to accept:

 Floating inputs

 Grounded inputs

I/O modules may be remotely or locally mounted.

7.8.3. Analogue inputs

All analogue modules shall be converted to standard engineering units and calculations – such as flow – be
carried at the transmitting device.

The minimum requirements for analogue inputs are:

 Fail to safe 4 - 20 mA

 Externally powered with fuse protection.

Page 55 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

All analogue modules shall be 4-20 mA HART.

7.8.4. Temperature inputs

The minimum requirements for temperature inputs are:

 Fail to safe 4 - 20 mA

 3 or 4 wire Platinum resistance temperature detectors (RTD) Class A

 Thermocouple modules (type K)

 Head mounted 2 wire transmitters.

7.8.5. Digital inputs

The minimum requirements for digital inputs are:

 24 V DC - Volt free contact/ Solid state

 Namur

 I.S. circuits to be isolated using galvanic isolators.

Each digital input card must have indepents common signals for every DI.

7.8.6. Digital outputs

The minimum requirements for digital outputs are:

 Fail to safe

 24 V DC

 Externally powered with fuse protection

Page 56 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Dry contact - 1 A.

 Relay (NO/NC) - 2 A.

 Solid state - 400 mA.

7.8.7. Pulse input

The minimum requirements for pulse inputs are:

 Frequency range: manufacturer standard

 Fused supply.

Page 57 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.9. OPERATOR INTERFACE

The Local control room is the focal point of the plant control and as such shall be ergonomically and
aesthetically designed to ensure that the operator’s working conditions are of a high standard and allow for
efficient working. The Contractor shall ensure that the design of the above areas is undertaken by experienced
interior design teams to ensure that co-coordinated designs are provided for all desks, furniture, partitions, walls,
ceilings and floors. Lighting is critical for efficient working in these areas and as such it shall be given high
priority in the CCR design. The selection of the interior design team and the choice of designs and materials
shall be subject to the approval of the Client.

The Contractor shall perform task analysis as defined in ISA-RP77.60.05-(R2007) or equivalent for the central
control room

Control room operators shall be provided with operator workstations and printers. Exact numbers shall be
determined during detailed design in consultation with the Client. Provisional quantities are indicated on the
conceptual system architecture drawings. These quantities are based upon the assumption that the maximum
number of operators in the LCR requiring workstation access will be five (2 +2).

Additionally, in existing CCR room shall be provided with EDCS one (1) operator workstation.

Operator workstations will be located onto office style desk furniture. Sufficient space for documentation shall
also be provided.

The operator workstation shall be fitted with screens capable of acting individually or together when required by
the operator.

The screens shall be of a size and definition that presents the process data in clear and unambiguous manner.
Each workstation shall be complete with a keyboard and either a tracker ball or a mouse or a touch screen.

The overall performance of the workstation shall not impact on that required to monitor and control the normal
operation of the plant and any emergency conditions.

Screens shall be suitable for the operating environment expected within the control rooms and the performance
unaffected by the expected lighting levels, viewing angles, reflections, etc. The screens shall meet the project
requirements with regard to life expectancy, reliability, availability etc.

One (1) large screen display shall be provided in the LCR to provide plant process overviews. The screen shall
have a minimum size of 60 inches and be suitable for wall mounting.

Additionally, in existing CCR room shall be provided one (1) large screen display to provide plant electrical
system overviews on EDCS. The screen shall have a minimum size of 60 inches and be suitable for wall
mounting.

Page 58 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

A separate Engineering workstation shall be provided to allow modifications to system software such as
sequences, graphics etc. The Engineering workstation should support access to third party application software
(e.g. Access database, Excel spreadsheet) via a Windows environment.

The following printers will be provided as a minimum in the LCR and in the CCR.

 LCR: Event/alarm laser jet printer, A4

 Color printer, A3 and A4

In general, all printing will be carried out on demand, not automatically, to minimize paper usage. Alarm and
event logs will be recorded to a log file and displayed in a window on the operator console.

Exact numbers shall be determined during detailed design in consultation with the Client. Provisional quantities
are indicated on the conceptual system architecture drawings.

7.9.1. Programming/Engineering Station

A complete programming/engineering station shall be supplied for file management, for off-line and on-line
programming of control software as well as observing complete portions of the running programs. It shall be
possible to down load compiled control software via a communication interface.

The programming / engineering station shall be supplied complete with full keyboard, 24 inch high resolution
colour monitor, the largest available hard disc (minimum 500Gbytes), a CD/DVD unit for manual or auto back-
up and the ability to use the network printer facilities.

A programming kit (comprising both the hardware and software) shall be available in order to store developed
programs.

The following data shall be accessible as a minimum:

 Programming and configuration data

 Logging files

 Status of inputs, outputs, markers, timers and counters

 Status of process data memory.

Page 59 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

System Configuration and Download Requirements

Via the engineering workstation it shall be possible to configure and download data without the need to stop,
halt or affect the running of any aspect of the DCS.

7.9.2. Operator Workstations

Operator workstations should preferably be PC based, but the Vendor may propose the use of proprietary
equipment.

The Contractor shall commission an ergonomic study of the Central Control Room to ensure that the operators’
working conditions are of a high standard and allow for efficient working. This study shall recommend the
optimal number of single, dual or triple monitors per workstation taking into account normal and abnormal
operation in the control room. Monitors shall be, at least, 1280 x 1024 or 1680 x 1050 (wide screen) pixel
resolution. Provisional number of monitors per workstation is two (2).

Exact numbers of workstations shall be determined during detailed design in consultation with the Client.
Provisional quantities are indicated on the conceptual DCS architecture drawings. These quantities are based
upon the assumption that the maximum number of operators in the control room requiring workstation access
will be five (2+2): 2 for RO Process Area and 2 for Utility Area.

In the existing CCR room the contractor shall provide one (1) EDCS operator workstation.

The workstations shall be independent from each other and shall be able to display all graphical and system
displays. In the event of failure of one operator workstation there shall be no impact on the ability of the
remaining workstations to fully control and monitor the entire plant facilities.

7.10. PROCESS REPORTS

Shift reports shall be generated at the end of each shift. The reports will contain the information that is needed to
hand over the responsibility of the operation of the plant.

Daily reports shall be generated to inform management of plant status. The report format is subject to approval
by the Client.

Operation records shall be generated to contain information relating to the particular mode of operations
(import/export, etc). Reports shall be generated automatically by the system at specified times or on user
request.

Page 60 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.11. TRENDS

It shall be possible to display any measured or calculated analogue variable as a trend curve during a time
interval selected with a minimum resolution of 1 sec. One display shall contain no more than 6 curves.

It shall be possible to additionally display the limit values as well as the current values on the same trend.
Additionally, it shall be possible to create long-term curves (up to 7 days) with longer sample rates for a limited
number of analogue data.

For all types of curves, trends and bar charts the representation of items and values shall be implemented with
identification code and clear text.

7.12. OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

This section describes the requirements regarding the control and operation of the plant and utilities.

7.12.1. Modes of Operation – Sequences and Operational Steps

The functional structure of the system shall be hierarchical, with three main levels of control as follows:

Control of primary elements (primary level), e.g. control valves, drive control and interlocks.

 Function group control/sequential control (secondary level). Co-ordination of primary elements with their
control circuits for multi loop control, for certain process sections and for well-defined process tasks.

 Multi sequence control. Highest level of hierarchical structure (tertiary level) including all tasks of the
unit control and co-ordination of several sequential controls.

The control tasks and the corresponding operator interface shall be structured in a way that operator intervention
via operator interface shall be possible on each individual level of control, from single drive up to group and
unit controls. In the event of any failure at the higher levels of the system, operation of the lower levels shall
continue without interruption.

Sequence logic for unit operations shall have automatic, semi-auto, step, manual and maintenance modes.

The presentation of an operation to the operator workstations shall include the following:

Page 61 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Identification of the running operation

 Identification of the running step

 Mode and state of the running operation and step

 Execution monitoring time of the operation and step

 Overview of the current and following step

 Overview of the conditions and actions of the steps

7.12.2. Operation/Step Modes

The following sequence mode definitions shall be used:

 AUTO In automatic mode, all control and report generation functions are taken by the DCS without
intervention of the operator (automatic sequence programs). The operator has a monitoring task and shall
act in case of abnormal situations only.

 SEMI AUTO In semi-automatic mode the operator initiates predefined operations and steps within the
sequence logic. All field devices and control loops will be accessible for operator manipulation.

 STEP After each command the next step within the operation will be executed. The operator may request
to bypass the process entry conditions of the step in this mode.

 MANUAL Operator initiates all operations manually.

 MAINT Devices are operated manually. Controllers may be put in LOC, MAN/AUTO mode. Device can
not be operated by DCS sequence.

7.12.3. Operator Commands

The following operator commands shall be available:

 OVERRIDE Override the start conditions of an operation or a step in the operation modes MAN or
STEP.

 START Activate an operation or a step when the operation mode is AUTO, SEMI AUTO, MAN or
STEP.

Page 62 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 PAUSE Pauses the execution of the current running step immediately. May be caused by the operator,
alarms, interlocks or specific checks. Timers, controllers and devices will be put in a pre-defined state.

 RESUME Restart from a PAUSE state.

 STOP Stops the execution of the current running step when the step has ended its normal task. Controllers
and devices will be put in a pre-defined state then. A restart is possible by the START command.

 ABORT Stops the execution of the current running step immediately. Controllers and devices will be put
in a pre-defined state then. This command may require manual actions to recover the status of the field
devices before a new START may be given.

 SKIPF The command to skip forward to the next operation (only in MAN mode) or a step (only in STEP
mode). This command may require manual actions to recover the status of the field devices before a new
START may be given.

 SKIPB The command to skip backwards to the previous operation (only in MAN mode) or a step (only in
STEP mode). This command may require manual actions to recover the status of the field devices before
a new START may be given.

 RESET Puts the uncompleted operation in the OFF state

 MAINT Allows the operator to place equipment in maintenance mode to allow it to be operated
independently and not be started by the DCS

The actual mode and command names may vary from those given above however the functionality shall be
maintained.

7.12.4. Sequence States

Sequence software shall allow the following state conditions:

 OFF ........................... The operation is not active.

 CHECKING .............. Checking the entry/start conditions of an operation or step. When a condition is
false, the operation state will become PAUSED.

 ACTIVE .................... The operation or step has been started to execute its task.

 PAUSED ................... The operation or step has been paused (within a step).

Page 63 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 STOPPED ................. The execution of a step is ready and waits for further operator commands to
proceed.

 COMPLETED........... The execution of an operation has been completed.

 ABORTED ................ The operation has been aborted for execution.

7.12.5. Sequence Messages

Sequences shall generate messages to the operator in order to detail actions which are taken by the system, or
actions which shall be required by the operator.

7.13. CONTROL CHARACTERISTICS

DCS controllers shall possess features that include, but are not limited to:

 Configurable control algorithms for each individual loop shall be employed. These shall include
Proportional (P), Proportional + Integral (PI), Proportional + Integral + Derivative (PID), with or without
cascade or ratio functions, and control correction algorithms where necessary. Limit functions shall be
available to limit rate at which controller output can increase.

 Auxiliary functions such as lead-lag, linearisation, totalisation, ratio, bias, multiplication/division,


addition/subtraction, override, square root, high-low signal select and controller gain scheduling.

 Open-loop controls for superior functions such as plant master control, sequential control, group control,
sub-group control and sub-loop control.

 Automatic sequencing of the start-up and shut down of equipment to minimize operator intervention
during normal and emergency operation, incorporating "one-button" start-up and shut down where
appropriate.

 Random Access Memory shall be protected against loss of power to the controller.

 Self-diagnostics giving alarm indications at board level and at the operator’s console for both hardware
and software failures, with description and location of failed unit. Failure of any system device shall be
alarmed.

 Communication with the operator’s consoles via a high speed data highway to enable the operator to
observe any parameter such as controlled variable, set-point, deviation, output, alarm settings, control

Page 64 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

settings, algorithms etc. With the appropriate security level, the operator shall be able to change any
parameter such as control settings, set point, output, etc.

 The control system shall allow bumpless switching for cascade control and bumpless transfer between
auto/manual controls.

 Fast cycle update time. The Vendor shall state and guarantee the maximum update time from an
event/alarm happening to that event being reported on the main control console.

 Fault tolerant and bumpless transfer between processors. The faulty/off line processor shall have the
ability to be replaced and uploaded without affecting the standby processor in any way.

7.14. LOOP FUNCTIONS

Functions shall be specified for each loop, as applicable, as detailed below.

7.14.1. Functionality

The functionality of the loop (or a combination of loops and programs) shall be defined with respect to what the
loop is specified to do and how this is implemented by this loop or a combination of loops and/or programs.
Relevant background information should also be provided as applicable.

7.14.2. Loop type

When a loop fits into one of the generic loop types it shall be identified in the Functional Specification.
Deviations from the generic loop types shall be identified.

7.14.3. Set Point Modes (for control loops only)

LOCAL...................... Set point remains as entered by the operator.

REMOTE .................. Set point is given by other loops or programs.

TRACK ..................... Set point will follow the measured value when the controller output mode is placed in
MAN or TRACK

HI/LO ........................ Set point limit values shall be defined to prevent the operator from attempting to enter
a set point outside predefined limits.

Page 65 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.14.4. Set point Switching

For a change from local to remote, provisions shall be made for an adjustable ramp function so that the set point
is gradually changed after switching

7.14.5. Output Modes

AUTO ....................... Output is controlled automatically

MANUAL ................. Output is controlled by the operator

For discrete devices (motors, valves) an AUTO/OFF/REM graphical soft key will be provided. The function of
the remote key is to allow field switches to control the motor or valve.

7.14.6. Trending

For analogue values, a definition of the minimum sample rate and the trend range shall be specified.

7.15. ALARMS, EVENTS AND INTERLOCKS

7.15.1. Alarms

The functionality of alarms is to inform operators when deviations occur during plant operation. In some cases
an alarm will interlock other devices without the need for operator action. Alarms shall be logged. The alarm
priority and acknowledgement shall be defined in detailed design.

The Contractor shall develop a comprehensive alarm philosophy customized to suit the project. The philosophy
shall be based upon industry standards and best practice including EEMUA 191.

The alarm philosophy will cover:

 Alarm objective analysis

 Alarm rationalization

 Alarm lifecycle management

 Alarm rates

Page 66 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Alarm distribution

 Nuisance alarms

 Smart alarming

 Alarm priorities and annunciation

 Alarm statistic gathering and analysis

Alarms shall be generated when the measured process variable exceeds predefined limits, when corrupted data
is detected, when feedback signals from equipment indicates a failure or a process operation is abnormal.

Alarms can be used as interlock condition for devices, loops or programs.

All alarms will require operator acknowledgement.

Alarms can be suppressed and alarm limits can vary in several process steps.

Alarms shall be displayed and logged and must include date and time.

All alarms will be generated and handled real time on a first up basis.

7.15.2. Events

An event is generated when an action has been taken such as equipment change of state, loop parameter tuning,
set point or loop mode change. Events do not require operator acknowledgement but shall be logged with date
and time.

Events i.e. actions below alarm level, shall only require a change of state on a graphical display and shall be
logged to electronic storage.

7.15.3. Interlocks

An interlock shall put a loop, device or sequence into a predefined state. When the permissive is cleared, the
interlocked item may return to the previous or predefined state, depending on the priority of the alarm or
condition causing the interlock. Some states will require operator input before return to the previous state.

There shall be displays showing the status of all interlocks. The displays shall show the state of the interlocked
devices as well as the state of all permissives for that device.

Page 67 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.16. SAFETY AND SECURITY

The DCS shall be designed to provide safe, secure, reliable and effective process control, communication,
alarm, monitoring and recording for the plant. Security shall include the provision of a password system to
prevent unauthorized access.

The DCS operator interface shall be provided with distinct levels of data access, based on the following
ascending levels:

 Operator level: providing access to all process displays, process and diagnostic data, change control loop
modes and set points and initiate and stop sequences, change operating mode (import/export) to allow
normal operation of the facilities.

 Supervisor level: allowing, in addition to the operator level, functions and modifications to sequence
operations (e.g. time and quantity values etc) to modify campaign mode operations.

 Engineering level: allowing for changes to loop tuning parameters and full diagnostic access and system
maintenance including the forcing of points for commissioning loop checks. Also develop, alter, test,
save, compile, download changes in the application logic software, operator interface software and
graphics generation software

The supervisor and engineer levels shall be separately password protected.

Also, the interface will provide a full audit trial capability by logging in the data historian the time duration of
all the users. The extent of these requirements will be determined during the detailed design phase.

7.17. SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS

The DCS equipment shall be interconnected via the DCS Vendor’s standard communications network, which
shall be redundant. The network shall include all software and hardware necessary to support transport of data
between all parts of the DCS i.e. controllers, I/O cards, operator interface etc.

The communication system shall be designed to ensure that failure of a single device in a communication path
does not lead to loss of DCS internal communications. Malfunctions shall be confined to the affected network
node and shall not affect any other node's ability to communicate. The DCS should be able to function at
reduced capabilities in the event of any critical communication fault.

Page 68 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

The communications network shall be highly reliable and the Vendor shall provide facilities for error detection
and correction. Communications shall employ industrially proven signaling standards.

Failure of any part of the communication data highway shall be detected and reported at the operator
workstations.

The DCS Vendor shall specify the maximum length over which the communication network will function (both
without and with repeaters), together with the maximum number of nodes the network can support in standard
configuration for each aspect of the network.

7.18. SOFTWARE

7.18.1. System Software

Existing software supporting standard system functions within operating systems, compilers, display controllers,
communications etc.

The system software shall be Vendor’s standard operating software and shall not require modification to meet
the requirements of this specification.

Software design shall be such that future revision or updates will not affect the successful operation of the
system

7.18.2. Application Software

Software developed specifically for the project, such as DCS sequence logic programs, database configuration
and display configuration.

Application software shall be designed in a manner that requires no modification to the system operating
software.

Software shall be specifically designed for the system and control application and meet the requirements as
defined within this specification.

Application software shall be used for the control of motors, valves and control loops and shall generate reports
and alarms as required. Set points will be calculated from control models or tables or from different process
parameters.

It shall be possible to select the chronological order of operations using sequence lists. Automatic operations
shall fulfill the demand of safe process control of the installations in all circumstances. In case of automatic
operations, operators shall be informed about conditions that obstruct the execution of the operation.

Page 69 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Only authorized personnel shall be allowed to modify the link between operations, to modify the set points of
sequences and to create new sequences by dedicated interfaces.

The software shall be developed using structured programming techniques, the basis of which shall be agreed by
the Contractor /Client prior to detailed implementation.

7.18.3. Database Software

All tag numbers shall be retained in an on line database within the system, together with all associated
information necessary for the system to function as specified. This shall include, but may not be limited to,
service descriptions and hardware details.

7.18.4. Communications Software

System software for communications shall have been proven in service.

7.19. GRAPHICS

The displays shall be steady, devoid of noticeable flicker, and shall be quickly configurable using standardized
software. System performance shall be such as to enable the operator to scan the plant and take control with no
noticeable waiting periods.

Dynamic information shall be configured using an object based software configuration that can be easily
configurable using a display editing facility. The number of objects shall not compromise the graphic
performance. Therefore, the Vendor must qualify their recommendation for objects per graphic page to meet the
specification.

7.20. DISPLAY TYPES

7.20.1. Operator Graphic Displays

Configured dynamic graphics or mimics shall represent areas of the plant by depicting vessels, pipes, valves,
etc. with status and real-time data, and are the primary user interface to the plant. The majority of plant control,
both manual and automatic, will be performed from this level of display.

The graphics shall be interactive and allow a user to quickly page through displays in order to effectively view
and control the plant. Access to plant items within the mimic shall be by cursor for rapid manipulation.

Page 70 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Animation for each process connected device shall be required as a minimum and shall typically indicate change
of state, value and alarm status. Interlocks shall be highlighted and distinguished.

Where the appropriate operator privilege is available, user manipulation of plant items can be achieved by
selecting the appropriate item, clicking on it to reveal its operation face plate then clicking on the desired
control command for that item, such as open, close, start, stop etc. A facility shall also be provided for the
operator to respond to sequence messages and prompts.

7.20.2. Pop Up Displays

These displays are available to provide detailed information where space is unavailable on the process graphic
display. These may typically provide access to control loop parameters for change or display purposes etc.

7.20.3. Specialty Displays

These displays are available to provide additional information where space is unavailable on the process graphic
display. These may typically provide access to complex control schemes, additional tabular data etc.

7.20.4. Trend Displays

Multi point real time trend displays shall show current values of any items assigned for trending by the operator
with selectable time bases ranging from seconds to several hours. The Vendor is required to specify the fastest
update rate available on the system.

Data compression techniques shall be utilized in the system to reduce storage capacity required for trend data.

Analogue values shall be set up to trend data with a 1 second update rate. Trend display information shall
include at least four variables per display, the variable tag-name, and numerical value of the last sample, with
engineering units. Zoom, pan and range expansion/compression facilities shall be provided.

Historical trending and archived historical trending shall be available for presentation on the screen, in operator
definable time bases, and using color coded trend lines.

All analogue input variables shall be configured to trends. Trends shall also be configured for PID loop
parameters which will include measured value, set point and output.

Page 71 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

7.20.5. Point Detail Display

These shall be configured for all tag items including PID loops, pumps, valves, heaters, agitators and analogue
variables. They shall present to the operator the full text and data associated with any plant item.

A control loop display shall augment printed data with a dynamic bar graph of set point, measured value and
output. This display shall enable all tuning parameters to be viewed and adjusted. For discrete points, bias and
control mode e.g. motor controls, the display shall enable the operator to view status and monitor commands to
start/stop motors, open-close valves, etc.

7.21. SEQUENCE OF EVENT RECORDING AND ALARMS

Sequence of event recording shall, as an integral part of DCS, perform a “first up” function in the case of major
sequential or cascade tripping by arranging the events in chronological order to establish the cause and effect
relationships.

Inputs to be included for SOE scan shall be identified and assigned to SOE input modules. All SOE inputs shall
be sourced directly from the primary input. SOE inputs shall be uniformly time stamped following any trip of
major equipment, sub-systems, unit or the plant as a whole, irrespective of the location of the SOE card in the
network.

It shall be possible to print SOE reports on demand for analysis.

Alarms shall comply with industry standards and best practice including EEMUA 191.

The functionality of alarms is to inform operators when deviations occur during plant operation. In some cases
an alarm will interlock other devices without the need for operator action. Alarms shall be logged. The alarm
priority and acknowledgement shall be defined in detailed design.

Alarms shall be generated when the measured process variable exceeds predefined limits, when corrupted data
is detected, when feedback signals from equipment indicates a failure or a process operation is abnormal.

Alarms can be suppressed and alarm limits can vary in several process steps.

Alarms shall be displayed and logged and must include date and time.

An intelligent alarm management system shall be provided with the following functions.

7.21.1. Automatic Alarm Suppression

Automatically identifies and suppresses the following types of nuisance alarms:

Page 72 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Repeated Hl/LO alarms caused by incorrect alarm setting

 Longstanding false Hl/LO alarms caused by incorrect alarm hysteresis setting.

 Oscillating Hl/LO alarms caused by incorrect PID setting

 Input out of range alarms caused by over range

 Input out of range alarms caused by minor transmitter problems

7.21.2. Automatic Alarm Reassignment

Periodically reassigns the status of the following alarms to a higher level to bring them to the attention of the
operator:

 Longstanding true alarms.

 Longstanding out of range alarms caused by wire breakage.

7.21.3. Automatic Alarm Prediction

Alarms may serve as an initiator to a process interlock that leads to a shutdown. The system shall automatically
predict when a process parameter will reach its alarm setting and issue an alert to the operator to enable a timely
intervention.

Page 73 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

8. INSTRUMENTATION DESIGN BASIS


This document covers the minimum technical requirements for the design, manufacture, testing, supply and
delivery of Analytical and Process Instrumentation complete with all components and ancillary equipment,
including all minor items not specifically referred to, but essential for the safe and satisfactory installation,
testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the equipment.

This document shall be used in conjunction with the instrumentation Data Sheets. In the event of conflict, the
instrumentation specific Data Sheets shall take precedence over the provisions of this specification.

8.1. UNITS OF MEASUREMENT

In general the International System (SI) units shall be used. The below table summarizes the projects units of
measurement.

Page 74 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Parameter Description Abbreviation

Flow : -

Liquid Volumetric Metres cubed per second m3 /s

Liquid Mass Kilograms per second; kilograms per kg/s, kg/h


hour,
Gas Volumetric Nm3 /h
Normal Cubic Meters per hour
Steam kg/h
Kilograms / hour
t/h
Tonnes per hour

Percentage
Level m, mm, %
Metres, millimetres

Pressure : - Bar (DP) Bar

Gauge Bar gauge Barg

Absolute Bar absolute Bara

Temperature Degrees Celsius C

Density Kilograms per cubic metre kg/ m3

Viscosity :-

Dynamic Centipoise cP

Kinematic Centistokes cSt

Gigawatt hours GWh


Energy
Kilowatt hours KWh

Conductivity Milli or micro Siemens mS or S

Electric current Ampere A

Frequency Hertz Hz

Page 75 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Parameter Description Abbreviation

Weight Grams, Kilograms g, kg

Toxic Gas Concentration Parts per million or parts per billion ppm or ppb

Flammable Gas Concentration Lower Explosive Limit % LEL

Oxygen Concentration Parts per million or Percentage ppm or %

Milligrams per litre or micrograms


Residual Chlorine mg/L or g/L
per litre

Voltage Volts V

Power Watt, kilowatts W, kW

Length Millimetres, metres mm, m

Volume Litres or cubic metres L or m3

Rotation Revolutions per minute RPM

Time Hour, seconds h, s

Velocity Metres per second m/s

Note 1: Normal Conditions 0 °C and 1.01325 Bara.

8.2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Instrument assemblies shall apply the following material requirements:

 The selection of materials shall be as specified in the data sheets, pipe specification and any referenced
project specification.
 Instrument materials of construction shall be suitable for the environment in which they are located and
application for which they are selected.
 All equipment shall be specified for correct operation with the process conditions
 Galvanic compatibility between dissimilar materials, with, if necessary the use of isolating bushes,
plates, etc. to prevent corrosion due to galvanic action

Page 76 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

 Aluminium and Aluminium-based alloys shall only be used for instrumentation with prior specific
agreement, item by item in writing from the Purchaser.
 Cast iron and ductile iron shall not be used for any item to which this specification applies.
 All proposed plastic components shall be defined in the Vendor's quotation together with any related
toxic and fire hazards.
 All spindles, bushings, bolting, screws, etc., shall be manufactured from a suitable grade of stainless steel
or other corrosion-proof material approved by the Purchaser.
 All moulded polyester parts shall be in an anti-static version for instruments to be located in classified
areas.
 Heavy duty cable tray, rack, supports and ladder shall be either aluminium or heavy duty hot dipped
galvanised steel. The material selection must be consistent throughout the project execution.

8.3. INSTRUMENTS

The design of instrumentation shall conform to good engineering practice and when no other standards are
stated BS 6739 - Code of Practice for Instrumentation in Process Control Systems – Installation, Design and
Practice shall be used. All systems should be designed to ensure safe operation or shutdown in the event of a
failure of electrical or pneumatic supplies.

The instruments type selection and specification will be proposed in accordance with P&ID and Instrument List.
Instrumentation shall be heavy duty and the latest models, reliable and suitable for the process application. The
instrument chosen for each application shall operate within the limits of performance as specified, and is to
incur the lowest practicable maintenance costs by equipment selection.

The Instrumentation shall provide information and controls to enable the plant and utilities to meet the specified
requirements for safety, product, quality, throughput, efficiency and economic operation. Safety critical and
safety related equipment shall be identified and designed in an appropriate manner.

All field instrumentation (including actuated valves) shall be dedicated to a particular control system,
instruments and valves shall not be dual use (i.e. instrumentation equipment used for control functions shall not
also be used for SIS functionality. Separate, independent devices shall be provided). Where feasible, transmitter
ranges shall be the same for “similar service” shutdown and control transmitters (identical ranges).

The accuracy of measurement shall be consistent with both the instrument’s required function and equipment
that is commercially available. Over/Under-range protection shall be supplied where necessary.

Page 77 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

All Field transmitters, including flow, level, pressure and temperature and analytical transmitters shall be
Profibus DP/PA devices. Where Profibus instruments are not available the use of convention analogue
instruments (4-20 mA HART) shall be used.

Material of construction for the transmitter electronics housing shall generally be aluminum as Vendor’s
standard, suitably protected against corrosion. All transmitters were provided with integral digital indicators.
Electrical entries to instruments were ½” NPT.

All parameters shall, wherever possible, be measured using transmitters. The use of switches shall be avoided
and shall require the prior approval of the Purchaser. Alarm and trip threshold values shall be derived from
within the control system as appropriate.

All In-line instruments shall comply with the requirements of the piping class or equipment in or on which they
are installed.

8.3.1. Analytical Measurement

In general and where the technology exists, it is preferred to carry out on line analysis via either an in-line probe
or sample loop. However where this technology is not available, it will be necessary to provide manual sample
points to facilitate off line laboratory analysis.

Particular attention must be paid to the arrangement of the sample system to ensure that a representative sample
is available to the analyzer at all times. Response times of the system shall be kept to a minimum. Filters or
alternative protection should be considered for dirty/corrosive sample streams. Special consideration must be
given to the handling and storage of special chemicals, and the removal of any waste by-products produced
during the analytical cycle.

The installation of all analytical measuring systems should be generally in accordance with BS 6739 - Section 5,
when no other standards are stated.

In general the transmitter shall be integral to the analyzer. It shall be permitted to mount the transmitter remote
from the sensor if the sensing point is inaccessible or the process temperature is outside that recommended for
the transmitter, but should be avoided if possible.

Where possible, sensors shall be grouped, at most in groups of two, in a single transmitter.

Page 78 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

8.3.2. Flow Measurement

Flow measurement selection shall be in accordance with the process conditions, accuracy requirements and
up/downstream piping arrangements.

Methods which may be utilized to measure flow include Orifice plate, Differential pressure transmitters,
Variable area, positive displacement, Coriolis mass meters, vortex, ultrasonic, magnetic and annubars
flowmeters.

Other methods may be utilized subject to the prior written approval of the Purchaser. Where increased accuracy
is required temperature and static pressure compensation shall be used in accordance with BS EN ISO 5167,
when no other standards are stated.

The installation of all low measuring systems must be generally in accordance with BS 6739 - Section 7.1.
Applications and features of selected flow meters are described in the following sections.

Where mass flow measurement is required, mass flow meters (eg Coriolis) shall be utilized where possible.
Alternatively, if a suitable device is not available, conversion of volumetric flow to mass flow by correction for
pressure, temperature or density may be utilised, under such circumstances the correction shall be performed in
the associated control system.

Flow meters should comply where required with the requirements of the European pressure equipment directive
PED 92/23/EC.

Orifice Plates & Other Differential Pressure Elements

Primary elements will be calculated, manufactured and installed in accordance with ISO 5167.

Orifice flanges rating will be Class 300 minimum, according to ANSI/ASME B16.36.

Flange material will be according to piping specification.

Averaging Pitot tube (“Annubar”) shall be used in large diameter lines and non-critical services where the
Orifice flanges become uneconomical and also in underground pipe lines. The annubar shall be non-retractable
type for periodic maintenance.

Page 79 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Differential Pressure Instruments

Differential-pressure type flow meter shall be installed with a three-way valve manifold fitted for pressure
balancing.

Accuracy of Differential pressure transmitter shall be less than 0.1% of span.

Variable Area Flow Meters

The metal tube variable area flow meters were generally proposed.

Accuracy of variable area flow meters shall be less than ±2.5% of full scale.

Positive Displacement Flow Meters

The wetted parts shall be Manufacturer‘s standard, suitably protected against corrosion.

Flange process connection shall be in accordance with piping specification.

Strainer will be provided for each Positive Displacement and Turbine Meters. The mesh of the strainer shall be
advised by the meter manufacturer.

Accuracy of positive displacement shall be less than 0.5% of span.

Coriolis Mass Flow Meters

The size of Coriolis mass flow meters will be calculated by AA and approved by CLIENT during detail
engineer.

The wetted parts will be 304 stainless steel as minimum.

Flange process connection will be in accordance with piping specification.

The accuracy for Coriolis Mass Flow Meter will be 0.5% of reading.

Page 80 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Vortex Flow Meters

The size of vortex flow meters will be calculated by AA and approved by CLIENT during detail engineer.

The wetted parts will be 304 stainless steel as minimum.

Flange process connection will be in accordance with piping specification.

Accuracy for Vortex Flow Meter shall be 1% of reading.

Magnetic Flow Meters

The size of magnetic flow meters will be calculated by AA and approved by CLIENT during detail engineer.

The wetted parts will be 304 stainless steel and lining PTFE as minimum.

Flange process connection will be in accordance with piping specification.

Sensing element will be two measurement electrodes (None removable).

Accuracy for Magnetic Flow Meter shall be 1% of actual flow meter.

Ultrasonic Flowmeter

Ultrasonic flow meter shall be used as follows:

- The line sizes are very large.


- They may be used also in cases where other types of flow measurements are not feasible because of
service conditions i.e. the minimum permanent pressure loss is required or economic reasons.

The selection of this flow meter is subject to Owner’s approval.

Accuracy of Ultrasonic flow meter transmitters shall be less than 1.0% of span.

Page 81 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

8.3.3. Level Measurement

The selection of level measuring devices and their installation shall provide reliable & reproducible
measurement with emphasis on simplicity of installation and maintenance. The installation of all level
measuring systems must be generally in accordance with BS 6739 - Section 7.4, when no other standards are
stated.

In general the transmitter shall be integral to the level device. It shall be permitted to mount the transmitter
remote from the sensor if the sensing point is inaccessible or the process temperature is outside that
recommended for the transmitter, but should be avoided if possible.

The material of Level Instruments will be in accordance with the corresponding Piping material Specification.

Ultrasonic Level

Range will be according to the maximum distance to be measured.

Transmitters will be assembled remotely unless the sensors are easily accessible. Transmitters will incorporate
echo suppression functionalities and the distance blockwill be set up.

Guided wave radar type level instrument

Guided Wave radar type Level transmitter shall be considered in suitable applications up to 3000 mm range
where the exact density of the liquid cannot be accurately determined and the density keeps changing from time
to time. The suitability is determined by the dielectric constant of process fluid and Manufacturer limitation.

In case over level than 3000 mm, radar non-contact type is taken into consideration.

Capacitance Level

Generally, the type of Level Switch Instruments will be proposed base on P&ID symbol. Switches type shall be
SPDT type.

Capacitance probes may be used for continuous level measurement of liquids or point measurement on both
liquids and solids.

Page 82 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Standard probe lengths shall be used where ever possible the use of spacers between the vessel connection and
probe to achieve the required switch point is permitted. Use of non-standard lengths shall not be permitted.

Probes shall normally be fully insulated with flange connections in accordance with the pipe specification.

Where a probe is used with a lined vessel an earth tube or probe fabricated from the appropriate material shall
be installed.

Differential Pressure for Level measurement

When measurement range exceed 1500 mm, and the density of the liquid inside the drum remains constant for
all operating conditions, smart differential pressure transmitters shall be used as a level measurement.

The differential level transmitter shall not be provided the manifold valve exception bubble type.

Float Transmitters / Switches

Generally, the type of Level Switch Instruments will be proposed base on P&ID symbol. Switches type shall be
SPDT type.

Where used the float level switch arm shall be of sufficient length to ensure that the float clears the nozzle and
vessel wall.

Materials for all wetted parts shall be compatible with the piping specification and process fluid.

Drain connection shall be provided at bottom of float chamber.

Level Gauges

Magnetic Level Gauges shall be used.

Connection of Level instruments shall be ¾” flanged. Drain and vent with plug shall be provided.

The level gauge shall be compatible with the design pressures and temperatures of the vessel.

The magnetic float shall be compatible with the specific gravity of the process medium to be held in the vessel.

The rotating leaves on the gauge shall be red below the liquid level and white above the liquid level.

Page 83 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

The gauges shall generally be suitable for mounting on the side of a vessel with a span between the process
connections greater than the span of the liquid to be measured. If the span of the liquid is greater than the
maximum span available on the gauge then it will be necessary to install more than one gauge on a bridal. On
smaller vessels it is acceptable to have a top mounted gauge off a single nozzle.

Displacer Type Instrument

Displacer in externally mounted chambers will generally be proposed.

Chamber will be designed with side-and-side connections wherever possible.

8.3.4. Pressure Measurement

The installation of all Pressure measuring systems shall be generally in accordance with BS 6739 - Section 7.2,
when no other standards are stated.

Pressure elements on vacuum service or on a service which may be subject to vacuum conditions (e.g. steam
collapse) shall have under range protection to full vacuum.

Pressure elements measuring a steady normal operating pressure should not exceed 75% of their calibrated
range. Pressure elements measuring a fluctuating pressure should not normally be operated beyond 60 % of their
calibrated range.

Differential pressure instruments shall be capable of withstanding full line pressure on either side without
affecting calibration.

Chemical seals shall be used on corrosive, viscous, and crystallizing fluids, slurries and fluids with solids in
suspension. Chemical seal / capillary fluid fill selection shall take into consideration the process conditions and
process media.

On steam service siphon blocks shall be used.

Transmitters

Pressure transmitters and Differential pressure transmitters were generally proposed gauge pressure transmitters
and run by impulse line.

Page 84 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Material of construction for all transmitter wetted parts will be stainless steel as a minimum.

The 3 way valve manifold will be provided for the different pressure (DP type) instrument, except different
pressure with capillary tube. Process connection shall be 1/2" NPT (Female).

Accuracy will be less than ±0.15% of Span.

Gauges

Pressure gauges shall be 100 mm diameter, 1/2 inch NPT bottom connection with stainless steel casing in
weatherproof industrial design (IP65 as minimum).

Pressure gauges shall be designed with safety glass plane with blow out facility and must withstand an
overpressure up 1.3 times the full scale value.

The accuracy shall be ±1.0% of Full Scale.

Glycerin filling will be applied for pulsation and vibration applications only.

Pressure gauges for steam or high temperature serviced will be protection by siphon. For pulsation services shall
be provided with a pulsation damper.

Pressure Switch

Without dial gauge will be provided. The output signal of pressure switches shall be dry contact type and
contract rating shall be depending on manufacture standard.

Process connection shall be ½” NPT-Male.

Accuracy will be less than ±2% of Full Scale.

8.3.5. Pressure Relief

Safety devices shall be provided for conditions as required by API STD 520 - Recommended Practice for the
Design and Installation of Pressure Relieving Devices, API STD 521 – Pressure relieving and De-pressuring
Systems and API STD 527 – Seat Tightness of Pressure Relief Valves.

Page 85 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Relief Valves

In general, conventional and balanced bellows spring-loaded pressure relief valves (PSV’s) shall be used for
pressure relieving applications.

The noise emitted by a single relief valve at maximum operation shall not exceed 110 dB(A) measured at 1
metre distance in any direction. Noise calculations shall be submitted to the Purchaser for review

All Process Pressure Relief Valves shall be code stamped. Thermal relief valves shall be stamped where
provided with an API orifice, otherwise they will not be stamped.

Rupture Discs

Rupture discs type devices may be used, with prior approval of the Purchaser, where an economic and
environmental advantage can be demonstrated over conventional valves. In certain circumstances they may be
used in combination with PSV’s.

8.3.6. Temperature Measurement

The selection of temperature measuring devices and their installation shall provide reliable reproducible
measurement with emphasis on simplicity of installation and maintenance. The selection of temperature
measurement instruments shall depend on the range required as detailed below. Vendor standard temperature
ranges must be used wherever possible.

The preferred method for remote measurement of temperature shall be resistance temperature detectors (RTD).
All standard temperature sensing devices shall be made from stainless steel and be installed in Thermowells.
The installation of all temperature measuring systems must be generally in accordance with BS 6739 - Section
7.3, when no other standards are stated.

Thermowells

Thermowell connection to the process shall be flange 1-1/2" ANSI B 16.5 and 304 stainless steel as minimum.
Flange rating shall refer to piping specification.

Natural frequency and stress calculation shall be done for all thermowells as per ASME PTC 19.3 and the
thermowells shall be designed to prevent mechanical failure due to vibration.

Page 86 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Thermowells shall be located downstream of related flow devices, pumps etc. and away from locations where
high vibration is evident.

Resistance Temperature Devices

Three wire, dual element, PT 100 resistance thermometers to IEC 60751 Class ‘A’ tolerance must be installed as
standard for monitoring temperatures up to 350 °C. Ceramic PT100 RTDs shall be used for temperatures up to
400°C.

Elements shall generally be supplied complete with extension and head unless the application dictates
otherwise.

Thermocouples

Thermocouples shall be in accordance with IEC 60584 with the hot junction insulated from the sheath.

Where the temperature measurement range required is beyond that of a RTD element (duties above 400 °C and
below 1260 °C) then thermocouples shall be used.

Elements shall generally be supplied complete with extension and head unless the application dictates
otherwise.

Transmitters

Temperature transmitters were designed remote type with digital indicator and accuracy will be less than ± 0.1
% of span.

8.3.7. Local Indicators/Gauges

Temperature gauges shall have multi-angle heads. Dial size shall be 4” (100mm). Display scales shall be in ºC
only and shall not have dual displays.

Bi-metallic indicators supplied complete with a thermowell shall be used for general duties.

Accuracy for temperature gauge was designed in accordance with ±1.0% of Full Scale.

Page 87 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

8.3.8. Miscellaneous Measurement

Weighing

The installation of all Weighing systems must be generally in accordance with BS 6739 – Section 7.6.

Where possible the use of three or more load cells should be used to support the weigh platform or vessel.
Systems with two cells or less and/or utilizing knife supports must be submitted to the Contractor for approval.
The preferred weigh cell type is a strain gauge consideration of other types must be submitted to the Purchaser
for approval.

It is essential that all mechanical / piping arrangements are approved by the weigh vendor in order to achieve the
required installed accuracy.

8.4. SIGNAL TRANSMISSION

The preferred method of control signal transmission shall be via bus powered Profibus PA. Where Profibus PA
is not available, control signal transmission shall be Profibus DP.

Where Fieldbus is not available, conventional electronic hardwired analogue instruments shall be 4-20 mA,
HART protocol for both initiating devices and end user. Where conventional SMART instruments are utilized
they shall be connected conventionally or via Fieldbus couplers.

The power supply for field devices shall be 24 Vdc or 230 Vac.

Digital signals from field equipment shall be 24 VDC with dry contacts. Where conventional Switches are used
for position indication, they shall be 2-wire proximity type (24Vdc). In the case of safety interlocks then
certified fail-safe switches shall be used. Position switches on valves shall be proximity type.

Page 88 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

9. CABLE BASIC SPECIFICATION


9.1. HAZARDOUS AREA REQUIREMENTS

The RAF A3 project shall in general be classified as a safe area. Hazardous areas may be identified in the UPS
Battery rooms, Diesel storage areas, Diesel jockey pumps and the emergency generators. These areas are
expected to have minimal instrumentation.

However where specified, equipment for use in hazardous areas shall be suitable for the hazardous area
classification. The preferred method of protection shall be flameproof.

Design and installation of equipment in hazardous areas shall be in accordance with ATEX 137 Explosive
Atmosphere Directive (99/92/EC), the National Electric Code NFPA 70 Article 505 and the Recommended
Practice for Classification of Locations for Electrical Installations at Petroleum Facilities Classified as Class I,
Zone 0, Zone 1, and Zone 2 (API 505).

9.2. EMC/RFI IMMUNITY

Equipment shall comply with IEC 61000 Parts 1-6: Electromagnetic Compatibility of Industrial Process
Measuring and Control Equipment.

All Instrumentation and control system equipment shall be immune to the effects of radio frequency interference
(RFI). The equipment shall be immune to the effects of hand-held radios and mobile telephones.

The Vendor shall provide an installation guide that gives details of physical and environmental requirements.
The Vendor shall also advise of any precautions necessary to prevent susceptibility to both RFI and conducted
or induced electrical interference.

Page 89 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

9.3. GENERAL SPECIFICATION

As a general rule the following cable specification is used:

The rated voltage shall be following the manufacture standard during detail engineering.

Conductor

The conductor shall be plain stranded annealed cooper wires accordance BS 6360 for instrument cable
and IEC 60228 for Power supply cable.

Insulation

The insulation shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) compound meeting the requirements of BS 6746
Type TM1 for instrument cable and IEC 60502-1, PVC/A for Power supplied cable. The average
thickness shall be not less than the nominal value following applied standard. The minimum thickness
at any point shall not fall below the nominal value by an amount more than 0.1 mm + 10%.

Page 90 of 91
RAFA3-AAY-211001 Instrumentation and Control Criteria Rev. 0/E 15-Jun-15

Armor Wire

Control and instrumentation cables shall be steel wire armored (abbreviated as SWA) for outdoor
applications. All cables shall be shielded, with a minimum conductor section of 0.5 mm2. Cables shall
be laid in trays, conduits or on ladder racks and shall be segregated from power cables in accordance
with International standards. All Out door cable trays/ladders shall be covered.

Page 91 of 91